ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

174
ALFOplus  A ccess Li n k F ull O utdo o r User manual  M N . 00 2 73 . E - 0 0 2 Volume 1/ 1

description

installing and integrating AlfoPlus MicroWave

Transcript of ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

Page 1: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 1/174

ALFOplus

A c ce s s L in k Fu l l O u t d o o r  

User manual

MN . 0 0 2 7 3 .E - 0 0 2  

V o lu m e 1 / 1  

Page 2: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 2/174

The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.

Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-

national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A.

Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen di-

splayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.

MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation

HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.

UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.

Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.

Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.

Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).

Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.

Page 3: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 3/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002  1

ALFOplus

Section 1.USER GUIDE 7

1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ............................................................................... 7

2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .......................................... 8

2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK..................................................................... 8

2.1.1 Artificial respiration.................................................................................. 8

2.1.2 Treatment of burns .................................................................................. 8

2.2 SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................. 9

2.3 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (Waste electrical & electronic equipment) ....11

3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL............................................................12

3.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL.................................................................................12

3.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................12

3.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................12

Section 2.DESCRIPTIONS ANDSPECIFICATION 15

4 LIST OF ACRONYMS .................................................................................................15

4.1 LIST OF ACRONYMS..........................................................................................15

5 PRESENTATION OF ALFOPlus RADIO SYSTEM ..........................................................17

5.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................17

5.2 APPLICATIONS.................................................................................................17

5.2.1 Functionalit2 ..........................................................................................18

5.3 PROGRAMMABILITY ..........................................................................................18

5.4 MAIN CHARACTERISTICS...................................................................................19

5.5 INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ..............................................................................24

6 DESCRIPTION AND CHARACTERISTICS OF

ALFOPlus29

6.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................29

6.2 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................29

Page 4: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 4/174

2 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

6.2.1 Baseband processor ................................................................................30

6.2.2 TRX Transceiver unit ...............................................................................30

6.2.3 Firmware ...............................................................................................30

6.2.4 Web Lct.................................................................................................30

6.2.5 Switch for Ethernet ports .........................................................................31

6.2.6 Synchronisation......................................................................................32

6.2.7 Adaptive code modulation........................................................................33

6.2.8 ATPC and ACM interaction........................................................................34

6.3 LOOPS ............................................................................................................35

6.4 ALARM SYSTEM................................................................................................36

6.5 CHARACTERISTICS...........................................................................................37

6.5.1 Electrical characteristics...........................................................................37

6.5.2 Line Interface Characteristics....................................................................44

6.5.3 Power supply and cable ...........................................................................54

6.5.4 Size ......................................................................................................54

6.5.5 Weights .................................................................................................54

6.5.6 Environmental conditions.........................................................................54

Section 3.INSTALLATION 57

7 INSTALLATION OF ALFOPlus SYSTEM ......................................................................57

7.1 GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION..........................57

7.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) .............................................58

7.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...............................................................................58

7.3.1 Standard coupling kit ..............................................................................58

7.4 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA .............59

7.4.1 ODU (Standard Lock) ..............................................................................59

7.4.1.1 1+0 ODU with integrated antenna ..............................................59

7.4.1.2 1+1 ODU with integrated antenna ..............................................60

7.5 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA...............61

7.5.1 ODU (Standard Lock) ..............................................................................61

7.5.1.1 1+0 ODU with separated antenna...............................................62

7.5.1.2 1+1 ODU with separated antenna...............................................62

7.5.1.3 Waveguide towards the antenna.................................................63

7.6 GROUNDING....................................................................................................647.7 USER CONNECTORS..........................................................................................71

Section 4.LINE-UP 75

8 LINE-UP OF ALFOPlus SYSTEM.................................................................................75

8.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................75

8.2 SWITCH ON .....................................................................................................75

8.3 ALARM LED CHECK ...........................................................................................76

Page 5: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 5/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002  3

8.4 CONNECTION PROCEDURE.................................................................................76

8.5 FIRST CONFIGURATION.....................................................................................77

8.6 OPTIMIZING ANTENNA ALIGNMENT WITH RX MEASUREMENT.................................79

8.7 ODU ACCESSING AND REMOTE MANAGEMENT......................................................82

8.8 FIRMWARE ......................................................................................................82

8.9 ADAPTIVE MODULATION....................................................................................83

Section 5.MAINTENANCE 87

9 ALFOPlus ALARMS AND LOOPS.................................................................................87

9.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................87

9.2 ALARMS ..........................................................................................................87

9.2.1 Alarm indications ....................................................................................87

9.2.2 SCT/WebLCT displayed alarms..................................................................88

10 ALFOPlus MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................91

10.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................91

10.2 MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................91

10.2.1 Periodical checks ....................................................................................91

10.2.2 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting) ..................................................92

10.3 TROUBLESHOOTING .........................................................................................92

10.3.1 Faulty condition detection ........................................................................92

10.3.2 Troubleshooting of a faulty unit ................................................................93

Section 6.PROGRAMMING ANDSUPERVISION 95

11 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION.........................................................................95

11.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................95

11.2 SUPERVISION THROUGH ETHERNET....................................................................95

11.2.1 General .................................................................................................96

11.2.2 Configurations ........................................................................................96

11.2.3 "Transparent in-band" management ..........................................................97

11.2.4 "VLAN based in-band" management ..........................................................98

11.2.5 "VLAN based In-band" drop node ..............................................................98

11.2.6 "Out-of-band" management .....................................................................99

11.2.7 Configurability ........................................................................................99

11.2.8 Address .................................................................................................99

11.2.9 Restore supervisioning access mode..........................................................99

Page 6: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 6/174

4 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Section 7.COMPOSITION 101

12 COMPOSITION .......................................................................................................101

12.1 GENERALS.....................................................................................................101

12.2 ALFOplus SYSTEM IDENTIFYING LABEL..............................................................101

12.3 AVAILABLE ALFOplus VERSIONS .......................................................................101

12.4 ODU INSTALLATION KIT..................................................................................106

Section 8.ADDENDUM 107

13 INTRODUCTION .....................................................................................................107

13.1 GENERALS.....................................................................................................107

14 ALFOplus 11GHZ CHARACTERISTICS......................................................................108

14.1 FOREWORD ...................................................................................................108

14.2 GENERAL.......................................................................................................108

14.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 108

14.2.2 Transmitter characteristics .....................................................................112

14.2.3 Receiver characteristics .........................................................................113

14.2.4 Radio flange.........................................................................................115

14.2.5 Power supply and consumption...............................................................115

14.2.6 Mechanical characteristics ...................................................................... 115

14.2.7 Environmental conditions ....................................................................... 116

15 ALFOPLUS 13GHz CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................117

15.1 FOREWORD ...................................................................................................117

15.2 GENERAL.......................................................................................................117

15.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 117

15.2.2 Transmitter characteristics .....................................................................120

15.2.3 Receiver characteristics .........................................................................121

15.2.4 Radio flange.........................................................................................123

15.2.5 Power supply and consumption...............................................................123

15.2.6 Mechanical characteristics ...................................................................... 123

15.2.7 Environmental conditions ....................................................................... 124

16 ALFOPLUS 15GHz CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................125

16.1 FOREWORD ...................................................................................................125

16.2 GENERAL.......................................................................................................125

16.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 125

16.2.2 Transmitter characteristics .....................................................................133

16.2.3 Receiver characteristics .........................................................................134

16.2.4 Radio flange.........................................................................................136

16.2.5 Power supply and consumption...............................................................136

16.2.6 Mechanical characteristics ...................................................................... 136

16.2.7 Environmental conditions ....................................................................... 137

Page 7: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 7/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002  5

17 ALFOPLUS 18 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................138

17.1 FOREWORD ...................................................................................................138

17.2 GENERAL.......................................................................................................138

17.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 138

17.2.2 Transmitter characteristics .....................................................................141

17.2.3 Receiver characteristics .........................................................................142

17.2.4 Radio flange.........................................................................................144

17.2.5 Power supply and consumption...............................................................144

17.2.6 Mechanical characteristics ...................................................................... 144

17.2.7 Environmental conditions ....................................................................... 145

18 ALFOPLUS 23 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................146

18.1 FOREWORD ...................................................................................................146

18.2 GENERAL.......................................................................................................146

18.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 146

18.2.2 Transmitter characteristics .....................................................................151

18.2.3 Receiver characteristics .........................................................................152

18.2.4 Radio flange.........................................................................................154

18.2.5 Power supply and consumption...............................................................154

18.2.6 Mechanical characteristics ...................................................................... 154

18.2.7 Environmental conditions ....................................................................... 155

19 ALFOPLUS 38 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................156

19.1 FOREWORD ...................................................................................................156

19.2 GENERAL.......................................................................................................156

19.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 156

19.2.2 Transmitter characteristics .....................................................................158

19.2.3 Receiver characteristics .........................................................................15919.2.4 Radio flange.........................................................................................161

19.2.5 Power supply and consumption...............................................................161

19.2.6 Mechanical characteristics ...................................................................... 161

19.2.7 Environmental conditions ....................................................................... 161

Section 9.LISTS AND SERVICES 163

20 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................163

21 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................167

22 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................171

Page 8: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 8/174

6 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Page 9: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 9/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 7

Section 1.USER GUIDE

1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

SIAE MICROELETTRONICAVia Buonarroti, 21 - Cologno (MI) - Italy

DECLARES

THAT THE PRODUCTS

Digital Radio Relay System ALFOplus

comply with the essential requirements of article 3 of the

R&TTE Directive (1999/05/EC)

and therefore are marked:

The following standards have been applied:

IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interface

EN 301 489-4 for EMC

EN 60950 for operator safety

EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio

EN 300 132-2 characteristics of power supply

EN 300 019 climatic characteristics (in operation: class 4.1 for ODU; storing: class 1.2; transport: class

2.3)

The equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.Following the requirements

of the R&TTE Directive (article 12) and the relevant decision of the EC, in term of classifica-tion of Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment and associated iden-

tifiers, the ALFO shall carry the 'class 2' identifier:

Cologno Monzese, 17/03/2008 On behalf of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA

  Chairman and Executive Officer

  Alberto Mascetti

Page 10: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 10/174

8ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETYRULES

2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK

Do not touch the bare hands until the circuit has been opened. pen the circuit by switching off the line

switches. If that is not possible protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the con-

ductor.

2.1.1 Artificial respiration

It is important to start mouth resuscitation at once and to call a doctor immediately. suggested procedure

for mouth to mouth resuscitation method is described in the Tab.1.

2.1.2 Treatment of burns

This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed whileartificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).

Warning

• Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections

• Apply dry gauze on the burns

• Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.

Page 11: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 11/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 9

Tab.1 - Artificial respiration

2.2 SAFETY RULES

When the equipment units are provided with the plate, shown in Fig.1, it means that they contain compo-

nents electrostatic charge sensitive.

Step Description Figure

1

Lay the patient on his back with his arms parallel to the body.

If the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his

stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patientsmouth and check that there is no foreign matter in mouth (den-

tures, chewing gum, etc.).

2

Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put an hand under

the patient’s head and one under his neck.

Lift the patient’s head and let it recline backwards as far

as possible.

3

Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to his chin and his

mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers

closed together.

While performing these operations take a good supply of oxy-

gen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open

4

With your thumb between the patient’s chin and mouth keep

his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities

5

While performing these operations observe if the patient’s

chest rises. If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that

case open the patient’s mouth as much as possible by pressing

on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth

and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patient’s chest

heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first

even when the patient’s nose is not obstructed, provided his

nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the

hand you were holding his head with. The patient’s head must

be kept sloping backwards as much as possible.

6

Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of

twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the

patient has regained conscious–ness, or until a doctor has as-certained his death.

Page 12: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 12/174

10ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication

In order to prevent the units from being damaged while handling, it is advisable to wear an elasticized band

(Fig.2) around the wrist ground connected through coiled cord (Fig.3).

Fig.2 - Elasticized band

Fig.3 - Coiled cord

The units showing the label, shown in Fig.4, include laser diodes and the emitted power can be dangerous

for eyes; avoid exposure in the direction of optical signal emission.

Fig.4 - Laser indication

Page 13: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 13/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 11

2.3 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (Waste electrical &electronic equipment)

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems). This

marking of Fig.5 shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with otherhousehold wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human

health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it

responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either

the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and

how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier

and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other

commercial wastes for disposal.

Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419

Page 14: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 14/174

12ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

3.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL

The purpose of this manual consists in providing for the user information which permit to operate and

maintain the ALFOplus radio equipment.

Warning: This manual does not include information relevant to the SCT/WebLCT management program

windows and relevant application. They will provided by the program itself as help–on line.

3.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE

The following knowledge and skills are required to operate the equipment:

• a basic understanding of microwave transmission

• installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system

• a good knowledge of IP networks and routing policy.

3.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

The manual is subdivided into sections each of them developing a specific topic entitling the section.

Each section consists of a set of chapters, enlarging the main subject master.

Section 1 – User Guide

It provides the information about the main safety rules and expounds the purpose and the structure of themanual.

Section 2 – Description and specifications

It describes a general overview of the typical applications and in particular of the whole radio equipment.

Section 3 – Installation

The mechanical installation procedures are herein set down as well as the user electrical connections.

The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.

Page 15: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 15/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 13

Section 4 – Line–Up

Line–up procedures are described as well as checks to be carried out for the equipment correct operation.

The list of the instruments to be used and their characteristics are also set down.

Section 5 – Maintenance

The routine maintenance actions are described as well as fault location procedures in order to identify the

faulty unit and to re–establish the operation after its replacement with a spare one.

Section 6 – Programming and supervision

The ALFOplus radio is programmed and supervised using different software tools. Some of them are al-

ready available, some other will be available in the future. This section lists the tools implemented and

indicates if descriptions are already available.

Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.

Section 7 – Composition

Position, part numbers of the components the equipment consist of, are shown in this section.

Section 8 – Addendum

ALFOplus technical radio specifications, available for each frequency, are described in this section.

Section 9 – Indexes and services

Lists of figures, list of tables and assistance service are shown in this section.

Page 16: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 16/174

14ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Page 17: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 17/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 15

Section 2.DESCRIPTIONS ANDSPECIFICATION

4 LIST OF ACRONYMS

4.1 LIST OF ACRONYMS

What follows is a list of acronyms used in this handbook:

- ACM Adaptive Code Modulation

- AGC Automatic Gain Control

- ATPC Automatic Transmitted Power Control

- BBP Base Band Processor

- BER Bit Error Rate

- CBS Committed Burst Size

- CF Coupling Flag

- CIR Committed Information Rate

- CoS Class of Service

- CVID Customer VLAN Identifier

- DSCP Differentiated Serviced Code Point

- EBS Excess Burst Size

- EIR Excess Information Rate

- ELP Ethernet Line Protection

- EVC Ethernet Virtual Connection

- FPGA Field Programmable Gate-Array

- IP ToS Type of Service IP

- LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol or Link Trunk

Page 18: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 18/174

16ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

- LAN Local Area Network

- LLF Link Loss Forwarding

- LNA Low Noise Amplifier

- MAC Media Access Control

- MDI Medium Dependent Interface

- MDX Medium Dependent Interface Crossover

- MEF Metro Ethernet Forum

- NE Network Element

- OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance

- ODU Outdoor Unit

- PLL Phase Locked Loop

- POE Power Over Ethernet

- PToS Priority Type of Service

- QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

- RED Random Early Drop

- RF Radio Frequency

- RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator

- RX Direction from antenna to user

- SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal

- SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

- SVID Service VLAN Identifier

- TX Direction from user to antenna

- UNI User Network Interface

- VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator

- VID Virtual Lan Identifier

- VLAN Virtual LAN

- WEBLCT WEB Local Craft Terminal

- WRR Weighted Round Robin

Page 19: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 19/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 17

5 PRESENTATION OF ALFOPLUS RADIO SYSTEM

5.1 GENERAL

ALFOplus is a full-outdoor and full IP digital radio system for point-to-point applications, used for high ca-

pacity Ethernet transport (1 Gbps). The frequency range is from 6 GHz up to 42 GHz with hitless adaptive

code modulation (from 4QAM up to 1024QAM).

There are two available versions for ALFOplus: Gigabit Electrical (GE) and Gigabit Optical (GO). This doc-

ument provides a general overview of ALFOplus (Access Link Full Outdoor) radio equipment.

5.2 APPLICATIONS

ALFOplus is the ideal solution in urban environments for all carrier-class applications in which the typical

requirements are Ethernet connections:

• full IP radio, providing the foundation for a leading edge network

• fully integrable with 3G, 4G, LTE nodes and backhaul

• ideal for a fast and flexible evolution towards full IP network

• complementary solutions for fibre deploy

• last mile fibre extension for business customers

• ISP high capacity and performance, for LAN-to-LAN connections

• emergency wireless links

• zero footprint applications

ALFOplus doesn’t need any indoor unit; power supply can be directly by POE+ through the data cable or

through a dedicated auxiliary port. It’s available 1+0 or 1+1 radio system configurable via software fol-

lowing two versions of ALFOplus:

• Electrical Gigabit Version

- LAN1 - 1x10/100/1000BaseT traffic and/or supervision port with clock and synchronism recov-

ery

- LAN2 - 1x10/100/1000BaseT supervision and/or traffic port with clock and synchronism recov-

ery

• Optical Gigabit Version

- LAN1 - 1x100/1000BaseX traffic and/or supervision port with clock and synchronism recovery

- LAN2 - 1x100/1000BaseT supervision and/or traffic port with clock and synchronism recovery

depending on software configuration made for each port LAN1 and LAN2.

Page 20: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 20/174

18ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

5.2.1 Functionalit2

SIAE ALFOplus radio system presents the same functionalities of a “switch” (Layer 2).

ALFOplus radio system is able to forward Virtual LAN in transparent way or to manage incoming traffic fil-

tering it or tagging it or dividing it in different VLAN. Traffic Flow control and Traffic priority capabilities can

be enabled or disabled via LAN software.

ALFOplus Ethernet switch functionality:

• MAC switching, Learning and Ageing

• Jumbo Frame up to 10 kbytes

• MEF 10.2 bandwidth profiles for Ethernet Services

• 802.1Q VLAN/VLAN stacking QinQ and VLAN rewriting

• IEEE 802.3x Flow control

• Flexible QoS based on VLAN (IEEE 802.1p), MPLS Exp BIT, ToS/DSCP (IPV4 or IPV6) per Port,

802.1p rewrite with MPLS

• Queue Packet with Drop Policy: Tail Drop, Queue Drop, Red, Wred/Strict, WFQ, Mixed

• Ethernet Frame Fragmentation

• Advanced multi-layer 1/2/3/4 header compressor algorithm

• IEEE 802.1d STP (Spanning Tree Protocol)

• IEEE 802.1v RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)

• IEEE 802.1ag OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance)/ITU-T y.1731/IEEE 802.3 ah

• IEEE 802.3ad LACP - Link Aggregation Control Protocol or Trunking Line or Link Aggregation

• IEEE 802.3af PoE - Power over Ethernet Enhanced

• Complete Synchronisation Management (IEEE 1588)

• ELP (Ethernet Line Protection)

• ITU G.8032 v2 Ethernet Ring Protection

• LLF (Link Loss Forwarding)

• Selective Rmon Statistics Based VLAN and Priority

5.3 PROGRAMMABILITY

ALFOplus radio system is managed by a microprocessor that makes it totally programmable via software

to perform the following functions:

• radio link management

- capacity and modulation

- Link ID

- Tx frequency and power

- ATPC (Automatic Transmission Power Control)

• main management

- IP port configurable and supervisioning

- routing table

- remote element list

- alarm severity configuration (modify alarm)

- user manager (password, user, SNMP login)

Page 21: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 21/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 19

• operation and maintenance

- permanent Tx Off 

- Rx signal threshold alarm

- performance monitoring (G.828, Rx PWR, Tx PWR, ACM) with alarm threshold

- S/N measure

- LAN summary, statistic basis on port, VLAN or Priority

- back-up/restore configuration

- software update

- report&logger maintenance (inventory, faul, commands)

- SNTP alignment

• manual operations (depends on timeout)

- Tx transmitter OFF

- force switch synch

- radio BER test

- radio loop

• Ethernet switch management and functionalities

• synchronisation

More links can be managed by LAN access (see Fig.7).

5.4 MAIN CHARACTERISTICS

- Tx power (at the antenna flange) see Tab.2

- Tolerance ± 2dB

Tab.2 - Tx power

Frequency Band (GHz) Guaranteed output power (dBm)

ALFOplus series 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

6 27 27 25 25 23 23 23 23 23 22

7 27 27 25 25 23 23 23 23 23 22

11 26 26 24 24 22 22 22 22 22 21

13 26 26 24 24 22 22 22 22 22 21

15 26 26 24 24 22 22 22 22 22 21

18 21 21 19 19 17 17 17 17 17 16

23 21 21 19 19 17 17 17 17 17 16

26 20 20 18 18 16 16 16 16 16 15

28 19 19 17 17 15 15 15 15 15 14

32 18 18 16 16 14 14 14 14 14 13

38 17 17 15 15 13 13 13 13 13 12

42 15 15 13 13 11 11 11 11 11 10

Page 22: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 22/174

20ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

- RF output attenuation up to 20, 1 dB step software adjustable

- ATPC range 20 dB implemented in 1 dB step

- Receiver threshold for BER=10-6  see Tab.3

Tab.3 - Receiver thresholds (Interleaving enabled)

6 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -95.5 -93.0 -89.5 -86.0 -84.5 -82.0 -78.5 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5

14 MHz -94.5 -91.0 -88.0 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5

28 MHz -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -80.0 -77.0 -74.0 -70.5 -68.0 -64.0

56 MHz -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -60.5

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5

14 MHz -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

28 MHz -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0

56 MHz -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5

7 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -95.5 -93.0 -89.5 -86.5 -84.5 -82.0 -78.5 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5

14 MHz -94.5 -91.0 -88.0 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5

28 MHz -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -80.0 -77.0 -74.0 -70.5 -68.0 -64.0

56 MHz -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -60.5

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5

14 MHz -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

28 MHz -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0

56 MHz -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5

Page 23: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 23/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 21

11 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -95.0 -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -84.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0

14 MHz -94.0 -90.5 -87.5 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.0

28 MHz -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5

56 MHz -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

14 MHz -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

28 MHz -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

56 MHz -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

13 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -95.0 -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -84.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0

14 MHz -94.0 -90.5 -87.5 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.0

28 MHz -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5

56 MHz -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

14 MHz -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

28 MHz -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

56 MHz -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

15 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -95.0 -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -84.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0

14 MHz -94.0 -90.5 -87.5 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.0

28 MHz -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5

56 MHz -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

14 MHz -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

28 MHz -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

56 MHz -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

Page 24: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 24/174

22ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

18 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -94.5 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -83.5 -81.0 -77.5 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5

14 MHz -93.5 -90.0 -87.0 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5

28 MHz -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -79.0 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5 -67.5 -63.0

56 MHz -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

14 MHz -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

28 MHz -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

56 MHz -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

23 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -94.5 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -83.5 -81.0 -77.5 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5

14 MHz -93.5 -90.0 -87.0 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5

28 MHz -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -79.0 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5 -67.5 -63.0

56 MHz -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

14 MHz -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

28 MHz -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

56 MHz -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

26 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -94.0 -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -83.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0

14 MHz -93.0 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -81.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.0

28 MHz -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0 -66.5 -62.5

56 MHz -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -92.0 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -81.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0

14 MHz -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -81.0 -79.0 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -67.0 -63.0

28 MHz -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5

56 MHz -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0

Page 25: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 25/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 23

28 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.5 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5

14 MHz -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

28 MHz -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0

56 MHz -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5

14 MHz -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

28 MHz -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

56 MHz -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5

32 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -92.0 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -81.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0

14 MHz -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.0 -67.0 -63.0

28 MHz -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5

56 MHz -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -90.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0

14 MHz -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.0 -68.0 -65.0 -61.0

28 MHz -86.0 -82.0 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5

56 MHz -83.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -71.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.0 -59.5 -55.0

38 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -92.5 -90.0 -86.4 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

14 MHz -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

28 MHz -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

56 MHz -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5

14 MHz -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5

28 MHz -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

56 MHz -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

Page 26: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 26/174

24ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

- Modulation 4QAM, up to 1024QAM

- Net bit rate (RF channel spacing) depending on modulation type (see Tab.4)

Tab.4 - Net Bit Rate

- Tx/Rx frequency spacing see Tab.5

- Tuning Frequency step 250 kHz

- Loop facility 1 RF loop, Baseband loop

5.5 INTERNATIONAL STANDARD

The equipment complies with the following international standard:

- EMC EN 301 489-4

- RF channel arrangement see Tab.5

42 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5

14 MHz -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

28 MHz -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

56 MHz -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5

14 MHz -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5

28 MHz -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0

56 MHz -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.5

Bandwidth 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz 9.295 10.872 16.225 21.080 24.483 30.293 36.102 41.912 47.763 53.572

14 MHz 16.393 22.025 32.870 42.705 49.599 61.368 71.137 84.906 96.759 108.529

28 MHz 32.956 44.279 66.081 85.854 99.713 123.373 147.034 170.694 194.524 218.185

56 MHz 65.912 88.558 132.161 171.708 199.425 246.746 294.068 341.389 389.048 436.369

1 RF loop is available for ALFOplus version with isolator

Page 27: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 27/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 25

Tab.5 - Go-return frequency

- Digital fixed point to point EN 301 128

- Climatic characteristics EN 300 019 (class 4.1 for ODU;

storage: class 1.2; transport: class 2.3)

- Safety EN60950

Frequency band

(GHz)Duplex Spacing Channel number Subbands

6L ITU-R F.383-8 and CEPT REC 14-01E - 252.04 MHz 3CH @ 29.65MHz 4

6U ITU-R F.384-10 - 340 MHz 3CH @ 40MHz 2

7.1 - 7.4 ITU-R F.385-9 Annex 3 - 196 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 3

7.1 - 7.4 ITU-R F.385-9 - 161 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3

7.1 - 7.4 CEPT REC(02)06 - 154 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3

7.1 - 7.4 168 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3

7.4 - 7.7 ITU-R F.385-9 - 161 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3

7.4 - 7.7 CEPT REC(02)06 - 154 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3

7.4 - 7.7 ITU-R F.385-9 Annex 3 - 168 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3

7.4 - 7.9 ITU-R F.385-9 Annex 4 - 245 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3

7.7 - 8.2 ITU-R F.386-8 Annex 6 - 311.32 MHz 4CH @ 29.65MHz 4

7.9 - 8.5 CEPT ECC REC(02)06 310 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 3

8.2 - 8.5 ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3 - 119/126 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3

7.9 - 8.4 ITU-R F.386-8 Annex 3 - 266 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 3

11 CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F387-10 - 490/530 MHz 4CH @ 40MHz 3

13 ITU-R F.497 - CEPT ERC/REC 12-02 E - 266MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 3

15 ITU-R F636 - 420 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 4

15 ITU-R F636 - 490 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 4

15 ITU-R F636 - 644 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 2

15 CEPT T/R 12-07 - 728 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 1

15 CEPT - 315 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 5

15 CEPT - 322 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 5

18 ITU-R F.595 - CEPT REC T/R 12-03 - 1010 MHz 12CH @ 27.5MHz 3

18 ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7 - 1560 MHz 15CH @ 27.5MHz 1

23 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 CEPT T/R 13-02 - 1008 MHz 11CH @ 28MHz 2

23 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4 - 1200 MHz 11CH @ 28MHz 3

23 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex1 - 1232 MHz 11CH @ 28MHz 3

26 ITU-R F.748 - Annex 1 and CEPT T/R 13-02 - 1008 MHz 16CH @ 28MHz 2

32 ITU-R F.1520 and CEPT Rec (01)02 - 812 MHz 10CH @ 28MHz 3

38 ITU-R F.749 and CEPT Rec T/R 12-01 - 1260 MHz 20CH @ 28MHz 2

42 ECC Rec (01)04 - 1500 MHz 18CH @ 28MHz (520 MHz) 3

Page 28: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 28/174

26ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Fig.6 - ALFOplus front/side view

   2   5

   4  m  m

  2  5  4   m   m

   1   5   7  m  m

Page 29: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 29/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 27

Fig.7 - Reachable links in ALFOplus sub-network

    A    L    F    O

   p    l   u   s

    A    L    F    O

   p    l   u   s

    A    L    F    O

   p    l   u   s

    A    L    F    O

   p    l   u   s

    1

    1

    1

    1

    1

    I   n    b   a   n    d   m   a   n   a   g   e   m   e   n   t    (   w    i   t    h   o   u   t    V    L    A    N    )

    A    L    F    O

   p    l   u   s

    A    L

    F    O

   p    l   u   s

    A    L    F    O

   p    l   u   s

    A    L    F    O

   p    l   u   s

    1

    1

    1

    1

    1

    O   u   t    b   a   n    d   m   a   n   a   g   e   m   e   n   t    (   w    i   t    h   o   u   t    V    L    A    N    )

    A    L    F    O

   p    l   u   s

    A    L

    F    O

   p    l   u   s

    A    L    F    O

   p    l   u   s

    A    L    F    O

   p    l   u   s

    1

    1

    1

    1

    1

    I   n    b   a   n    d   m   a   n   a   g   e   m   e   n   t    (   w    i   t    h    V    L    A    N    )

    2

    2

    2

    2

   p   a   y    l   o   a    d   +

    m   a   n   a   g .

   p   a   y    l   o   a    d

   m   a   n   a   g .

   p   a   y    l   o   a    d    (    V    L    A    N   x    )   +

   m   a   n   a   g .    (    V

    L    A    N   y    )

Page 30: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 30/174

28ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Fig.8 - In-band management

Fig.9 - Drop node

Fig.10 - LAO (Local Access Only)

ALFO

plus

ALFO

plus

1 1payload +

 manag.

payload +

 manag. 2

Switch

payload +

 manag.

Switch

payload +

 manag.

2

ALFO

plus

ALFO

plus

1 1payload +

 manag.

 management only2

IP1

payload +

 manag.

2 management only

IP2

IP1

IP2

ALFO

plus

ALFO

plus

1   1payload

2

MNGT

payload

MNGT

2

management onlymanagement onlyXX

Page 31: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 31/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 29

6 DESCRIPTION AND CHARACTERISTICS OFALFOPLUS

6.1 GENERAL

SIAE ALFOplus is a radio system for digital link in full outdoor mechanics.

ALFOplus (Access Link Full Outdoor) microwave radio system is available in various frequency ranges from

6 to 42 GHz.

The Outdoor Unit can be easily installed and configured owing to its:• reduced size

• easily orientable antenna

• broad operating temperature range

• high flexibility of line interfaces selection

• low consumption.

The first description given in the following first concerns the circuitry common to all the versions, then that

of the line interfaces will follow.

6.2 DESCRIPTION

The ALFOplus consists of two PCB housed in a small size aluminium cabinet:

• BBP-GE (Baseband processor Gigabit electrical)

• TRx (IF and RF transceiver)

or

• BBP-GO (Baseband processor Gigabit optical)

• TRx (IF and RF transceiver)

The description that follows (see Fig.19 and Fig.20) details the block diagrams of electrical and optical ver-sion.

Page 32: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 32/174

30ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

6.2.1 Baseband processor

The baseband Processor (BBP) carries out the following operations:

• primary and secondary power supply

• line interfaces and protections

• baseband circuits and packets processing

• I and Q signals generation and sampling

• I, Q demodulator

• Rx baseband filtering

• Actuators and measurement points for TRx unit

• FPGA debug connector

• FPGA

• Controller

BBP unit is different depending on the interface type (electrical or optical).

6.2.2 TRX Transceiver unit

TRX Transceiver consists of the following functional blocks:

• power supply dedicated to microwave circuits

• Tx baseband filtering

• I, Q modulator

• frequency synthesizer

• microwave transmitter and receiver

• IF devices on Rx side

6.2.3 Firmware

Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality and it is distributed on

two hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.

Firmware can be updated through the Web Lct and it is stored in two different memory benches: one con-

taining the running firmware and the other the stand-by firmware. This permits to download a new

firmware release to the stand by bench without cutting the traffic

Use “Bench Switch” to activate the bench in stand-by (SW restart will be performed).

6.2.4 Web Lct

The Web Lct is a web interface software already present in the ALFO Plus, which requires Adobe Flash Play-

er and allows the configuration and the management of the local radio, using LAN Port Management. When

the remote one is configured properly, the whole link can be managed (left side=local radio and right

side=remote radio). WEB Lct runs on any browser (Internet Explorer, Firefox etc....).

Web Lct console is a free software downloadable from the site www.siaemic.com after registration.

Page 33: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 33/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 31

6.2.5 Switch for Ethernet ports

Inside ALFOplus is present an Ethernet switch with 2 external ports line side (electrical 10/100/1000BaseT

or optical 100/1000BaseFX), one internal radio port and one port towards controller (see Fig.11).

Internal port is represented by the local radio stream where through native Ethernet transport is connected

with the remote equipment.

Fig.11 - ALFOplus block diagram

Switch function

ALFOplus can operate like a switch between two or more separated LANs with the following advantages:

• to connect two separate LANs

• to connect two LANs via radio within a complex digital network

• to keep separated the traffic into two LANs towards MAC filtering to get a total traffic greater than

the traffic in a single LAN.

By default the routing works on basis Mac Address (Layer 2), but it can be enabled on basis VLAN ID, in

Web Lct - Ethernet switch (Enh) - Common Parameters.

The operation is the following: when a LAN port receives a MAC frame, on the basis of destination address,

it decides which LAN to send it:

• if destination address is on originating LAN the frame is discarded

• if destination address is a known address (towards address learning procedure) and is present into

local address table, the frame is sent only on destination LAN (MAC switching)

• otherwise the frame is sent to all ports with the same VLAN ID (flooding).

Ethernet Speed/Duplex function

With electrical interface, in Web Lct - Baseband - Lan, Speed/Duplex can be manually or automatically

activated as half Duplex or Full Duplex 10/100/1000Base-T, while with optical interface, Speed Duplex can

be set as Full Duplex 100/1000Base-X.

Link Loss Forwarding

Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) is an alarm status of Ethernet interface. LLF can be enabled or disabled.

If LLF is enabled, any linkdown alarm will generate the alarm status of Ethernet interface blocking any

transmission to it. LLF can be enabled for each ports.

With LLF enabled the equipment connected (routers, switches so on) can be notified that radio link is not

available and can temporarily re-route the traffic.

Ethernetpacket switch

Port ARadio1+0

LAN1

LAN2

10/100BaseT

1000BaseT

10/100/1000BaseT

Microcontroller

Page 34: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 34/174

32ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

MDI/MDIX cross-over

For each LAN interface, cross-over cable can be set in Web Lct - Baseband - Lan - Cable Crossover as:

• Automatic - Lan recognizes automatically the connected cable type (Straight cable or Crossover ca-

ble)

• MDI (NIC) - Manual crossover wiring type T568A

• MDI-X (Switch) - Manual crossover wiring type T568B

With crossover cable it is necessary to use the same wiring format (MDI/MDI or MDI-x/MDI-x) on both

ends. In case of straight cable is the opposite.

VLAN functionality

ALFOplus works with IEEE 802.1q and 802.1p tag. Tag is made up with:

• a fixed word of 2 bytes

• 3 bits for priority according with 802.1p

• 1 fixed bit

• 12 bits VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) according with 802.1q.

Switch cross-connections are based on Vlan Configuration Table where input and output ports or only out-

put ports should be defined for any used VID. Vlan ID (VID) has a range from 1 to 4095.

Ethernet Flow Control (802.3x)

A network device asks its adjacent devices to send a pause frame because the input is faster it can process.

The protocol used for this purpose is the flow control (802.2x).

6.2.6 Synchronisation

Into ALFOplus a synchronisation circuit, called SincE and defined by the standard G.8264, gets the syn-

chronisation signal from the following different sources:

• LAN1

• LAN2

• radio

• Internal source

As shown in Fig.12 the clocks extracted from the sources are sent to a selection circuit that chooses one

of the signals depending on the control sent by a selection logic.This latter acts on the base of alarm roots (Synch Loss, Synch Drift, Holdover Freerunning), on the base

of assigned priority, manual forcing and preferential switch.

The selected clock drives an oscillator through a PLL circuit. The oscillator will generate the required syn-

chronisation for the frame generation. If no input signals are available the internal oscillator source is used

for the local restart.

Page 35: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 35/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 33

Fig.12 - Synchronisation block diagram

6.2.7 Adaptive code modulation

ACM profiles

In ALFOplus radio family uses Adaptive Code and Modulation (ACM) in order to employ the correct modu-

lation profile depending on the Rx signal quality.

Available ACM profiles are the following:

• 4QAM strong

• 4QAM

• 16QAM strong

• 16QAM

• 32QAM

• 64QAM

• 128QAM

• 256QAM

• 512QAM

• 1024QAM (optional).

These profiles operate in an RF channel with the following bandwidth:

• 7 MHz

• 14 MHz

TE LAN-1

Clock SelectorSynchronisationSource

TE LAN-2

T2 Radio

Internal Clock

PLLCircuit

Sync Loss

Sync Drift

Status

T0 ReferenceClk

Alarms

Force Switch

Priority Control

Preferential Switch

   S  e   l  e  c  t   i  o  n 

   L  o  g   i  c  a   l

Page 36: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 36/174

34ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

• 28 MHz

• 56 MHz

• 112 MHz (optional).

ACM switching

The usage of the previous modulation profiles in a fixed channel bandwidth results in a variable capacity.

The criteria defining the necessity of an ACM switching, upshift or downshift, is the Rx S/N ratio.

• Upshift - When there is an increase of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the modu-

lation complexity is increased in the direction from 4QAM strong to 1024QAM increasing the spectral

efficiency

• Downshift - When there is a decrease of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the mod-

ulation is reduced in the direction from 1024QAM to 4QAM strong reducing the spectral efficiency,

In order to configure properly the radio link using ACM facility, an optimization must be found between

max traffic during good propagation conditions and max availability during bad propagation conditions. To

obtain this purpose the ACM in ALFOplus family can be configured via software setting the following pa-

rameters: ACM setting and Tx Power mode.

ACM setting

The ACM can vary modulation profiles between two extremes defined by the operator through software

configuration: Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation.

• Upper modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the better condition (high

Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the maximum throughput defined at Upper Modulation: the

highest modulation profile that ACM can employ

• Lower modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the worst condition (low

Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the minimum throughput, defined at Lower Modulation: the

lowest modulation profile that ACM can employ

Tx Power Ramp

Tx Power Ramp function permits to set Tx power according to the available modulation profiles.

• Tx Power Ramp Disabled - Tx power is the same at any modulation profile

• Tx Power Ramp Enabled - Maximum Tx power based on the reference modulation

The Tx Power Ramp is set depending on the modulation license of the user and depending on the Lower 

Modulation that has been set.

6.2.8 ATPC and ACM interaction

The Automatic Transmission Power Control (ATPC) regulates the RF output power of the local transmitter

depending on the value of the RF level at the remote terminal. This value has to be preset from the local

terminal as threshold high and low. The difference between the two thresholds must be equal or higher

than 3 dB.

As soon as the received level crosses the preset threshold level low due to the increase of the hop atten-

uation, a microprocessor (µP), embedded in the ALFOplus, at the receiver side of the remote terminal

sends back to the local terminal a control to increase the transmitted power.

A good set of the thresholds is to put the ATPC Low Level threshold higher (or even slightly higher) than

the threshold of the highest modulation scheme of the ACM; this way, the ATPC start to work before than

the received signal is reduced and by consequence will force the system to downgrade the modulation. The

behaviour of the system is to always try to increase the PTX and so the System Gain, before than beingforced to reduce capacity a modulation.

Page 37: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 37/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 35

Resuming, the correct setting of the thresholds is when the two windows, the ATPC one and the ACM one,

are not overlapped, as per Fig.13.

Fig.13 - ATPC diagram

6.3 LOOPS

To control the equipment correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The com-

mands are forwarded by the WEBLCT program. The available loop facilities are:

• Baseband loop

• RF loop (only for GB8xxxx)

Fig.14 - Available loops

Thresh High

Thresh Low

Hop attenuation (dB)

ATPC range

PTx max.

PTx min.

Remote PRx

dBm

Local PTxdBm

Hop attenuation (dB)

Tx

Rx

Rx

Tx

PTx actuation

Local Remote

PRx recording

Transmission

of PTx control

µP µP

level

PTx control

ACMrange

Thresholdhighest ACM

profile

ALFO Plus

BBP-GE RADIO

RF Loop

BASEBANDLOOP

Page 38: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 38/174

36ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

6.4 ALARM SYSTEM

There are two ways of processing the alarms:

• through LEDs

• through SCT/WebLCT

Alarm associated to ALFOplus can be classified in different groups. Names and composition of these groups

as well as association between alarm classes and relay contact can be defined by the customer.

Alarms are divided into 4 severity levels according to the effects that an alarm might cause to the regular

operation of the unit detecting it. Levels are prioritised as follows:

• Critical (out–of–service), urgent alarm

• Major (severe failure, minimum residual functionality), urgent alarm

• minor (failure neither urgent nor remote, high residual functionality), not urgent alarm

• warning (failure neither urgent nor remote, high indication or wrong configuration), not urgent

alarm

• none (the alarm is masked)

Critical and Major alarms indicate impossibility of executing a service, hence the faulty units needs to be

serviced. Minor level represents the not urgent alarms which do not prejudice service continuity. Warning

level indicates malfunctions that might be locally removed without having to replace the unit.

Alarm classification can be modified via SCT/WebLCT operator. A short description is given for each alarm

in “Alarms” section with relevant class.

The visual indication is given by a LED, which can be green or red. The information provided are:

• Red light:

- ON - An internal alarm is active. Connect the PC for troubleshooting

- Flashing - An external alarm is active

• Green light:

- Flashing - No radio connection with far-end terminal

- ON - Radio connection with far-end terminal is active

Page 39: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 39/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 37

6.5 CHARACTERISTICS

6.5.1 Electrical characteristics

Tab.6 - Tx power

- RF output attenuation up to 20 dB, 1 dB step software adjustable

- ATPC range 20 dB

- Rx max input level (at antenna flange) –20 dBm

- Receiver threshold with BER = 10-3 see Tab.7

Frequency Band (GHz) Guaranteed output power (dBm)

ALFOplus series 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

6 27 27 25 25 23 23 23 23 23 22

7 27 27 25 25 23 23 23 23 23 22

11 26 26 24 24 22 22 22 22 22 21

13 26 26 24 24 22 22 22 22 22 21

15 26 26 24 24 22 22 22 22 22 21

18 21 21 19 19 17 17 17 17 17 16

23 21 21 19 19 17 17 17 17 17 16

26 20 20 18 18 16 16 16 16 16 15

28 19 19 17 17 15 15 15 15 15 14

32 18 18 16 16 14 14 14 14 14 13

38 17 17 15 15 13 13 13 13 13 12

42 15 15 13 13 11 11 11 11 11 10

Page 40: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 40/174

38ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Tab.7 - Receiver thresholds (Interleave enabled)

6 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -95.5 -93.0 -89.5 -86.0 -84.5 -82.0 -78.5 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5

14 MHz -94.5 -91.0 -88.0 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5

28 MHz -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -80.0 -77.0 -74.0 -70.5 -68.0 -64.0

56 MHz -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -60.5

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5

14 MHz -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

28 MHz -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0

56 MHz -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5

7 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -95.5 -93.0 -89.5 -86.5 -84.5 -82.0 -78.5 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5

14 MHz -94.5 -91.0 -88.0 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5

28 MHz -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -80.0 -77.0 -74.0 -70.5 -68.0 -64.0

56 MHz -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -60.5

Radio GuaranteedRSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10

-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5

14 MHz -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

28 MHz -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0

56 MHz -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5

Page 41: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 41/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 39

11 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -95.0 -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -84.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0

14 MHz -94.0 -90.5 -87.5 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.0

28 MHz -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5

56 MHz -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

14 MHz -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

28 MHz -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

56 MHz -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

13 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -95.0 -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -84.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0

14 MHz -94.0 -90.5 -87.5 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.0

28 MHz -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5

56 MHz -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

14 MHz -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

28 MHz -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

56 MHz -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

15 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -95.0 -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -84.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0

14 MHz -94.0 -90.5 -87.5 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.0

28 MHz -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5

56 MHz -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

14 MHz -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

28 MHz -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

56 MHz -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

Page 42: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 42/174

40ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

18 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -94.5 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -83.5 -81.0 -77.5 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5

14 MHz -93.5 -90.0 -87.0 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5

28 MHz -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -79.0 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5 -67.5 -63.0

56 MHz -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

14 MHz -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

28 MHz -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

56 MHz -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

23 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -94.5 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -83.5 -81.0 -77.5 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5

14 MHz -93.5 -90.0 -87.0 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5

28 MHz -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -79.0 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5 -67.5 -63.0

56 MHz -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

14 MHz -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

28 MHz -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

56 MHz -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

26 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -94.0 -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -83.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0

14 MHz -93.0 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -81.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.0

28 MHz -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0 -66.5 -62.5

56 MHz -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -92.0 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -81.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0

14 MHz -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -81.0 -79.0 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -67.0 -63.0

28 MHz -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5

56 MHz -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0

Page 43: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 43/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 41

28 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.5 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5

14 MHz -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

28 MHz -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0

56 MHz -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5

14 MHz -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

28 MHz -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

56 MHz -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5

32 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -92.0 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -81.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0

14 MHz -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.0 -67.0 -63.0

28 MHz -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5

56 MHz -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -90.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0

14 MHz -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.0 -68.0 -65.0 -61.0

28 MHz -86.0 -82.0 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5

56 MHz -83.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -71.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.0 -59.5 -55.0

38 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -92.5 -90.0 -86.4 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

14 MHz -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

28 MHz -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

56 MHz -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5

14 MHz -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5

28 MHz -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

56 MHz -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

Page 44: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 44/174

42ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

- Modulation 4QAM up to 1024QAM

- Number of settable RF channel depending on RF band and capacity

- Tuning frequency step 250 kHz

- Tx/Rx frequency spacing see Tab.5

- Net bit rate (RF channel spacing) see Tab.8

- Ethernet latency see Tab.9

Tab.8 - ALFOplus net bit rate

- Link ID identifier RFOH: 1 to 255

- Loop facility Baseband loop, RF loop (only for GB8xxxx)

- Spurious emissions/rejection according to ETSI

42 GHz

Radio Normal

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5

14 MHz -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

28 MHz -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

56 MHz -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5

Radio Guaranteed

RSL threshold (dBm)

@BER10-6

Physical Mode

Channel spacing 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5

14 MHz -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5

28 MHz -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0

56 MHz -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.5

Bandwidth 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 MHz 9.295 10.872 16.225 21.080 24.483 30.293 36.102 41.912 47.763 53.572

14 MHz 16.393 22.025 32.870 42.705 49.599 61.368 71.137 84.906 96.759 108.529

28 MHz 32.956 44.279 66.081 85.854 99.713 123.373 147.034 170.694 194.524 218.185

56 MHz 65.912 88.558 132.161 171.708 199.425 246.746 294.068 341.389 389.048 436.369

Page 45: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 45/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 43

Tab.9 - Ethernet service delay (latency), interleaving enabled

One way delay

(msec)Physical Modes (64 bytes)

Channel size

(MHz)

4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 1.100 1.083 1.069 1.064 1.060 1.056 1.054 1.051 1.049

14 0.649 0.641 0.634 0.632 0.629 0.627 0.626 0.625 0.624

28 0.329 0.325 0.321 0.320 0.319 0.318 0.318 0.317 0.316

56 0.170 0.168 0.166 0.166 0.165 0.164 0.164 0.164 0.163

One way delay

(msec)Physical Modes (128 bytes)

Channel size

(MHz)4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 1.148 1.120 1.095 1.088 1.078 1.071 1.068 1.063 1.060

14 0.674 0.660 0.648 0.644 0.639 0.636 0.634 0.632 0.630

28 0.342 0.335 0.329 0.327 0.324 0.323 0.322 0.321 0.321

56 0.177 0.174 0.171 0.169 0.169 0.168 0.167 0.167 0.167

One way delay

(msec)Physical Modes (256 bytes)

Channel size

(MHz)4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 1.247 1.194 1.146 1.132 1.114 1.101 1.095 1.087 1.081

14 0.723 0.697 0.674 0.666 0.658 0.652 0.649 0.645 0.641

28 0.367 0.354 0.342 0.339 0.335 0.332 0.331 0.329 0.327

56 0.191 0.185 0.179 0.177 0.175 0.173 0.172 0.172 0.171

One way delay

(msec)Physical Modes (512 bytes)

Channel size

(MHz)4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 1.438 1.338 1.247 1.218 1.185 1.163 1.151 1.133 1.124

14 0.820 0.770 0.725 0.712 0.695 0.684 0.678 0.669 0.664

28 0.418 0.393 0.371 0.364 0.356 0.350 0.347 0.343 0.341

56 0.218 0.206 0.195 0.191 0.187 0.185 0.183 0.181 0.179

One way delay

(msec)Physical Modes (1024 bytes)

Channel size

(MHz)4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 1.824 1.628 1.450 1.395 1.329 1.284 1.261 1.228 1.208

14 1.014 0.917 0.830 0.803 0.770 0.748 0.737 0.721 0.711

28 0.519 0.470 0.426 0.414 0.397 0.386 0.380 0.372 0.368

56 0.272 0.248 0.227 0.220 0.212 0.206 0.203 0.200 0.197

One way delay

(msec)Physical Modes (1518 bytes)

Page 46: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 46/174

44ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

6.5.2 Line Interface Characteristics

Ethernet interface

- Ethernet connectors IEEE 802.3 10/100/1000BaseT RJ45

IEEE 802.3 100/1000BaseX LC

- Ethernet latency   ≤ 2193 μs for standard frame size

≤ 8570 μs for jumbo frame size

Features of Ethernet switch enhanced

To have Ethernet switch enhanced you need to set Ethernet Enh as Present  in Web Lct - Equipment Menu

- Equipment - Configuration; this allows to have the new features in the Ethernet switch menu and Lan

interfaces. In the following a description of the advanced features:

• Ingress Filtering Policing (CIR/EIR according to MFE 10.2)

• Enhanced QoS Management

• Enhanced VLAN Management

• Ethernet Frame Fragmentation

• Packet Compression

• Link Aggregation (IEEE 802.3ad) Load Balancing

• Ethernet Line Protection

• ITU-T Y.1731 Eth OAM/IEEE 8902.1ag/IEEE 802.ah

• Selective RMon VLAN Based

• SNMP V3

• ITU G.8032 v2 Ethernet Ring Protection

Channel size

(MHz)4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 2.193 1.905 1.644 1.562 1.466 1.400 1.367 0.001 1.289

14 1.200 1.058 0.929 0.890 0.842 0.809 0.792 0.768 0.754

28 0.615 0.544 0.480 0.460 0.436 0.420 0.412 0.399 0.393

56 0.324 0.289 0.257 0.247 0.235 0.227 0.223 0.219 0.214

One way delay

(msec)Physical Modes (10000 bytes)

Channel size

(MHz)4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7 8.570 6.698 5.001 4.471 3.844 3.417 3.196 2.874 2.692

14 4.418 3.493 2.655 2.394 2.048 1.873 1.764 1.606 1.516

28 2.284 1.824 1.407 1.277 1.123 1.018 0.964 0.885 0.840

56 1.227 0.997 0.789 0.724 0.646 0.594 0.567 0.528 0.505

Page 47: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 47/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 45

Ingress Filtering Policing (CIR/EIR according to MFE 10.2)

ALFOplus allows to limit the ingress traffic rate on the basis of:

• LAN port (Bandwidth profile per UNI): a different profile is defined for each LAN port (VLAN ID and

priority are not considered in this case by the rate limiting algorithm)

• VLAN (Bandwidth Profile per EVC): a different profile is defined for different VLANs (priority is not

considered in this case by the rate limiting algorithm). Up to 64 VLAN can be managed with different

profiles

• VLAN+priority (Bandwidth Profile per CoS): a different profile is defined for different couples

VLAN+priorities (up to 64 different cases can be managed). In this case the packet priority is always

considered by the rate limiting algorithm. More than one priority can be included in the same band-

width profile.

In general different criteria can be defined for each port/VLAN/priority. Up to 64 Ingress Filtering Policy

resources can be defined and each bandwidth profile defined on the basis either of LAN port, VLAN or

VLAN+priority consumes 1 of such resources.

In order to define the bandwidth profile, the following parameters must be configured:

• CIR (Committed Information Rate:) it is admitted ingress rate (“green” coloured), with values be-

tween 0kbit/s and 1 Gbit/s

• CBS (Committed Burst Rate): it is the maximum size of the token bucket of the green packets, with

values between 0 byte and 256 kbyte.

• EIR (Excess Information Rate): it is maximum ingress rate eventually admitted (“yellow” coloured),

with values between 0 kbit/s and 1 Gbit/s

• EBS (Excess Burst Rate): it is maximum size of the token bucket of the yellow packets, with values

between 0 byte and 256 kbytes

• CF (Coupling Flag): if enabled, the excess token eventually charged into the green bucket are

moved into the yellow packet bucket.

Red packets, i.e. the ones exceeding the CIR+EIR rate, are automatically discarded.

The combination of CIR and EIR rates is typically referred to as PIR , or Peak Information Rate, which

represents the total burstable bandwidth sold to the customer.According to MEF 10.2 (Metro Ethernet Forum) specifications, the “bandwidth profile” service attribute (In-

put Filter Policing), which includes some or all of the above categories, can be defined per UNI, per EVC or

per CoS identifier (CoS ID; EVC.CoS). For any given frame, however, only one such model can apply. The

service provider meets the bandwidth guarantees by reserving appropriate network resources and employ-

ing a two-rate/three-colour (trTCM) rate-limitation methodology as part of its traffic engineering policy to

ensure compliance by user traffic.

• Green = Trasmitted: CIR and CBS.

• Yellow = Low Priority (dropped in case of congestion): EIR and EBS.

• Red = Dropped: traffic exceeding EIR and EBS is dropped.

For any port it is possible to add a Input Filter Policy table with this selections:

• Disable

• Uni Port Based

• EVC C_Vid Based

• COS C_Vid + Priority Based

• EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based

• COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based

CIR (green) EIR (yellow) dropped (red)

CBS (green) EBS (yellow) dropped (red)

Page 48: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 48/174

46ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

According the status of 802.1q Management> 802.1q settings =

• Disable: you can select only Uni Port Based with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

• Fallback: two selections 1) EVC C_Vid Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with CIR, EIR, CBS and

EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with priority range,

CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

• Secure: two selections 1) EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based: applied to a SVLAN S_Vid and a CVLAN C_Vid

with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a

SVLAN S_Vid and CVLAN C_Vid with priority range, CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

Into ALFOplus there is a total of 64 instances of Input Filter Policing for all the four ports into any radio port.

Any CVID can be used into only one port.

Into same port same CVID can be reused but with different priority.

Enhanced QoS Management

The ALFOplus scheduler provides enhanced QoS management features. based on the ingress port (and op-

tionally also as a function of the LAN-ID), there are four different modes that can be used to set the priority

of an Ethernet frame:

• Ethernet: the priority is set based on the PCP (Priority Code Point) field of the VLAN tag

(IEEE802.1p) (Native 802.1p C_Vid)

• MPLS: the priority is set based on the EXP (Experimental Bit) field of the PLS tag (Native MPLS)

• IP: the priority is set based on the DSCP field of the either IPv4 or IPv6 (Native ToS/DSCP)

• Default: the priority is set in a static mode and its value is configurable based on the VLAN ID. The

Default mode is also used when all the other criteria are not applicable (Port Default).

It is in addition possible to map the EXP quality of the MPLS label into the PCP field of the outer VLAN tag

(802.1p Rewrite with MPLS). Once the priority is assigned, the packet is sent to one of the 8 output queues.

The size of each one of the 8 queues is configurable with one value between the following four options:

128kbit, 256kbit, 512kbit and 1024kbit.

On the basis of the filling status of the queue, different drop-policy can be applied. In ALFOplus there arefour available policies:

• Tail drop: if the packet is arriving into a full queue, it will be discarded

• Queue drop: if a new packet is arriving into a full queue, the whole queue is emptied (with the ex-

ception of the head packet)

• RED: when a new packet is arriving into the queue it has a discarding-probability that is function of 

the filling status of the queue. the relation between the probability and the queue status is defined

by means of a SW configurable curve. If the queue is full, the new packet is discarded with proba-

bility 1 (like in the Tail drop case).

• WRED: it is similar to RED, with the difference that for each queue two drop’s curves are defined.

the packet in ingress is coloured according to MEF 10.2, i.e.e according to the CIR and EIR ingress

filtering policy defined. As a consequence, WRED can be chosen only if CIR/EIR Ingress filtering pol-

icy is enabled for the ingress port. Once coloured, “red” packets are always discarded, while “green” and “Yellow” packets are managed according to different curves.

the traffic in the queues is then emptied by means of either Strict priority or Weighted Fair Queue algo-

rithm. With the Strict Priority the highest priority takes always precedence. With WFQ the available band-

width is shared between the different priorities with configurable weights. It is in addition possible to

configure at the same time some queues as Strict Priority and the remaining as WFQ.

 “Random Early Drop” function is shown in Fig.15.

Page 49: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 49/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 47

Fig.15 - “0” red curve

• RED (Random Early Drop): no packet are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches

Smin(G, Green), packets are dropped randomly until a percentage of Pmax and an Occupation %

of Smax(G) limits are reached, all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G);

• RED Gentle (Enable): no packets are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G,

Green); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G), packets

are dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and

Smax(G)/Pmax(G); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G) the percentage of ran-

domly dropped packets is defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/

100%;

• WRED (Weighted Random Early Drop): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets,

one line for Yellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy

(Lan1,2,3,4);

no green packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G, Green);

no yellow packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin (Y, Yellow);

with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets are

dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/

Pmax(G);

with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) yellow packets are

dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/

Pmax(Y);

all green packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G);

all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(Y);

• WRED Gentle (Enable): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets, one line for

Yellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy

(Lan1,2,3,4);for Green packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G);

with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets are

dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/

Pmax(G);

with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G), the percentage of dropped green packets

is defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/100%;

for Yellow packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(Y);

with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) green packets are

dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/

Pmax(Y);

with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(Y), the percentage of dropped green packets

is defined by the straight line between Smax(Y)/Pmax(Y) and Sgentle(Y)/100%;

WRED and WRED Gentle are very efficient to get the most from the radio link available traffic avoiding the

 “stop and go” behaviour (SAW trend) typical of congested TCP/IP traffic.

Warning: RED and WRED impact only TCP/IP traffic, not UDP traffic.

Page 50: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 50/174

48ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Ethernet Frame Fragmentation

QoS preserve High priority traffic, by giving them precedence during traffic congestions. However, in case

of real time traffic also latency and jitter are important factors. Latency is strictly related to the line speed

and usually can be managed by designing the network topology in a proper way (e.g. by limiting the max-

imum number of hops in link chains). Jitter is instead a more sensitive parameter because it depends on

the traffic conditions.

In fact, when a High priority packet has to be sent over the radio link it is scheduled on a High Priority

queue. However, before to be sent over the radio link it has to wait that the packet currently in transmis-

sion (also a Best Effort packet) will be entirely sent. This waiting time can considerably change depending

on the best effort packet size (from 64bytes to 1518 bytes of even more in case of jumbo frames). One

technique used to mitigate this phenomenon is packet fragmentation, i.e. longer frames are subdivided in

smaller fragments at Tx side. A label is added to the packet in order to number these subframes. At Rx

side the original frame is rebuilt after all the fragments are received. In this way, the maximum waiting

time for a High Priority packet is reduced to the sub-frame size (some hundreds of bytes), providing sen-

sitive benefits to the packet jitter.

ALFOplus allows to fragment Ethernet frames with two options: 256 or 512 Bytes.

Enhanced VLAN Management

ALFOplus provides the following enhanced VLAN management features:

• VLAN rewriting

• Selective QinQ based on VLAN and IEEE 802.1p priority

VLAN rewriting

VLAN rewriting is a feature available on radio side that allows to rewrite the VID of C-TAG of the packet

received (uplink side) or sent (downlink side) by the switch.

On uplink side (packets received by the switch) the VID can be rewritten on the basis of the following cri-

teria:

- LAN port + C-VID: new values of C-VID to be written into the packet can be configured on the basis

of its original C-VID and the LAN port where it has been received.

- LAN port + C-VID + priority: new values of C-VID to be written into the packet can be configured

on the basis of its original C-VID + priority and the LAN port where it has been received.

On uplink side it is possible to configure for all the LAN ports up to 64 LAN port + C-VID or LAN port + C-

VID + priority criteria.

On downlink side (packets sent by the switch) the VID can be rewritten on the basis of the C-VID of the

received packet. I.e., new values of C-VID to be written into the packet can be configured on the basis of 

its original C-VID. It is possible to configure up to 64 C-VID criteria in downlink, independently by the uplink

configuration.

Selective QinQ based on VLAN and IEEE 802.1p priority

VLAN staking (also named QinQ) is a feature that allows an Ethernet frame to include more than one IEEE

802.1Q TAG. The scope of VLAN staking is to differentiate the traffic at different levels when the packets

must cross networks managed by different entities.

The ALFOplus radio supports the Vlan staking. Once a packet enters into the radio it is possible to add a

new IEEE 802.1Q TAG. The VID of the new TAG can be set based on different criteria:

- Ingress port of the packet

- C-VID and priority of the packet when received on the ingress port

The new TAG is added to the packet as a S-TAG. The Ethertype field of the TAG can be set either to stand-

ard values (0x88A8, 0x9100, 0x9200, 0x9300) or to any other custom values.

Page 51: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 51/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 49

Packet Compression

ALFOplus provides header packet compression. This feature allows to compress the packet header by

transmitting over the radio link proprietary labels in place of long and repetitive header field.

ALFOplus Single layer Packet Compression supports the following protocols: Ethernet, MPLS, IPv4/IPv6,

UDP and RTP and LTE S1 interface tunnelling. This latter cover the case of LTE eNodeB backhauling on S1interface, where the eUE traffic (either IPv4 or IPv6) is enveloped into a GTP-U tunnel. the Header com-

pressed in this case includes (IPv4+UDP+GTP-U of the S1 interface)+(IPv4/IPv6+UDP+RTP of the eUE

traffic inserted into the tunnel).

When enabled, the user can select which header have to be compressed considering the following maxi-

mum limits:

• the total header field size cannot exceed 124 bytes

• the total header field size after internal coding cannot exceed 118 bytes. the internal coding is re-

quired by ALFOplus in order to perform the compression task.

In Fig.16 are detailed the different header fields that can be selected with their weight in terms of header

field size and header field size after internal coding.

Page 52: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 52/174

50ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Fig.16 - Header compression

LAG - Link Aggregation (IEEE 802.3ad)

Link Aggregation (LAG) is a feature available on SIAE ALFOplus equipment that allows assigning up to 2

physical links to one logical link (trunk) that functions as a single, higher-speed Ethernet link.

SIAE ALFOplus support IEEE802.3ad LAPC (Link Aggregation Control Protocol). LACP allows a network de-

vice to negotiate an automatic bundling of links by sending LACP packets to the peer (directly connected

device that also implements LACP). In addition to the increased capacity and/or protection line of the log-

ical link and/or protection line, LACP provides additional advantages:

• Failover detection when a link fails, allowing for a trunk reconfiguration in order to avoid systematic

packet loss (after the reconfiguration the packets will be lost only if the throughput exceed the trunk

capacity)

• it introduces an agreement between the two LACP peers before the staring of data transmission over

the trunk. This prevent anomalous behaviour in case of cabling or configuration mistakes.

Header

field size

(Bytes)

Header fieldsize after

internal coding

(Bytes)

Ethernet

C-TAG (802.1Q)

Q-in-Q (802.1ad)

MAC-in-MAC (802.1ah)

(default=1)

MPLS

Max number of MPLS labels (from 1 to 3), PW included (default=1)

Control Word (RFC4385)

IP+

UDP

RTP

Tunneling OPv4 - IPv4/IPv6(IPv4+UDP+GTP-U+IPv4/IPv6+UDP+RTP)

IPv4 only (default)

IPv4 or IPv6

Max number of S-TAG (from 1 to 2)

+14 +12.5

+4 +2

- -

+(4*n) +(2*n)

+22 +18

- -

+(4*n) +(4*n)

+4 +3.5

- -

+20 +19.5

+40 +39.5

+8 +8

+12 +12

+100 +99

Page 53: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 53/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 51

LACP works by sending frames (LACPDUs) over the links belonging to the trunk. Also the equipment de-

ployed on the other end of the trunk will send LACP frames over the same links: this enables the two units

to establish the trunk. LACP can be configured two modes: active or passive. In active mode it will always

send frames along the configured links. However, in passive mode it acts as “speak when spoken to” and

therefore it can be used as a way of controlling accidental loops (as long as the other device is in active

mode). SIAE ALFOplus implements an “active” LACP.

A Line Trunk can aggregate up to 2 LAN interfaces with the following restrictions:

• all the LAN interfaces must be defined with the same speed (either 10, 100 or 1000 Mbit/s)

• all the LAN interfaces must be set in Full Duplex mode

When a Trunk is defined on SIAE ALFOplus, the end-to-end traffic is transmitted over all the aggregated

lines. As a result, the overall capacity of the trunk can be theoretically equal to the number of aggregated

lines multiplied by the capacity of a single line. In the example of Fig.17, two full duplex - 1Gbit/s connec-

tion are grouped into the same trunk, carrying all the capacity in transit from a radio link to another. In

this configuration, the line aggregation is used as line protection, although it can transport 2 Gbit/s capac-

ity.

Fig.17 - Line trunking

To enable the Link Aggregation on both interfaces (LAN1 and LAN2), select the group “Enable - Trunk1” or

 “Enable - Trunk2” or “Enable - Trunk3” or “Enable - Trunk4” in Web Lct - STP/ELP trunking menu.

Line Protection through distributed ELP

ELP (Ethernet Line Protection) is a feature available on ALFOplus that allows to protect a GE interface

against cable failure or accidental disconnection. With ELP it is possible to connect an ALFOplus to another

network element by using two GE interfaces. Both interfaces are active but just one is enabled to forward

and receive traffic (forwarding state), while the other does not allow any traffic to pass (blocking state). If 

the forwarding interface goes down, the other one passes to the forwarding state. The typical switching

time is around 1.5sec. This feature does not imply the use of any protocol, but is simply based on the status

of the physical interfaces. As a consequence, no particular protocol support is required on the connected

equipment: it is simply required to enable the two GE interfaces.

It is recommended to disable any Spanning Tree protocol on the external equipment: this could cause long-

er traffic recovery times.

To enable the Ethernet Line Protection on both interfaces (LAN1 and LAN2), select the group “ Enable -

Prot1” or “Enable - Prot2” in Web Lct - STP/ELP trunking menu.

Ethernet OAM (operation Administration and Maintenance)

This protocol can be used in any point-to-point Ethernet link. The aim of this protocol is to check and mon-

itor the functionality of the service that the provider guarantees on the network.

Service Layer OAM

The Service Layer OAM fully monitors a customer End-to-End Ethernet Service. Two main standards coverthis topic, the IEEE 802.1ag and ITU-T Y.1731.

LAN1 1 Gbit/s

1 Gbit/sLAN2

LAN1

LAN2

Line

trunking

2 Gbit/s

ALFOPlus ALFOPlus

Page 54: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 54/174

52ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

The IEEE 802.1ag provides CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) useful for detecting, isolating and re-

porting connectivity faults. The ITU-T Y.1731 Standard comprehends the CFM plus some additional fea-

tures, like RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) that allows to report back to the start of the chain the Alarm

message.

SIAE ALFOplus supports CFM according to both standards ITU-T Y.1731 and 802.1ag.

The IEEE 802.1ag and the ITU-T Y.1731 are End-to-End service, i.e. provides the tools to monitor the Eth-ernet Service regardless of the layers, Network Path and operators. Since the spectrum of application can

include many applications a more hierarchical structure is needed.

The Standards define:

• Maintenance Domains (MD): these specify the Domains of operators, users and service providers.

Levels from 0 to 7 are possible depending on the type of service to be monitored. Customer Domain

is the higher which includes both ends of the Ethernet service (from one End user to the other End

user), Standard Default values for Customer Domain are 7, 6 and 5. Service Provider Domains

should have a MD lower than the Customer Domain since include the whole network except the End

Users. Standard default values for Provider Domains are 3 and 4. Operator Domains are lower than

Service Provider Domains since just a part of the network is included. Standard Default values for

operator domains are 0, 1 and 2. Here follows a picture explaining the hierarchical structure of Main-

tenance Domains.

• ALFOplus: each interface can be configured as MEP, Port A interface (radio interface) included. Oncechosen the interface, depending on the network topology, the direction of the MEP has to be spec-

ified. Two Directions are possible, MEP “ “ and MEP “ “. With MEP “ “ configured the OAM PDUs

are sent from the interface in the direction outside the equipment, i.e. the OAM PDUs are sent from

the interface on the cable toward next equipment. With MEP “ “ configured the OAM PDUs are sent

from the interface toward the inside of the equipment and will follow the VLAN table previously con-

figured. MEPs are distinguished from each other through a MEP ID, therefore MEPs belonging to

same MA must have different MEP Ids.

In order to configure a MIP the MA has to be habilitated on the equipment. Up to 32 MIPs or MEPs

can be configured on each equipment.

The protocols belonging to the Connectivity Fault Management implemented in SIAE equipment are follow-

ing listed:

• Continuity Check Protocol: this protocol enables the sending of a periodic message (like a Heartbeat

message) which enables the other MEPs deployed in the network to distinguish the status of a vir-

tual connection. This massage can only be originated by a MEP.

• ALFOplus: is adjustable with 1s, 10s, 1min, 10min. These messages do not trigger any automatic

reply from the destination entity.

• LoopBack Protocol: it resembles an IP PING message; once this message is sent (e.g. MEP1 sends

a Loopback Message to MEP2). MEP2 replies to MEP1 confirming therefore the status of the connec-

tion. This is done to check the status of the connection between the MEP originating the message

and the MEP/MIP to which the message is addressed. This message can only be originated from one

MEP and can be addressed to both MEPs or MIPs.

• ALFOplus: the number of Loopback Messages in ALFOplus equipment is adjustable from 1 to 5 con-

secutive Loopbacks. In each equipment, it is possible fro each MEP to check the presence of other

MEPs in the same MA. This is done through the “Remote MEP” application which allows this acknowl-

edgement and distinguishes the other MEP through means of MEP IDs and MAC address.

• Link Trace Protocol: this protocol sends a message similar to the LoopBack protocol. Every equip-ment that is reached by this message will answer to the sender providing its own MAC Address. In

this way the sender is able to understand of which equipment the MA is composed. E.g. a MEP sends

the Link Trace Message to another MEP belonging to the same maintenance association. The MIPs

that are eventually deployed in the middle of the path will forward this message and answer to the

initiating MEP with their own MAC Address. By doing so the initiating MEP knows the OAM-devices

deployed in the path and their order.

• Remote Defect Indicator: this feature allows a MEP, in presence of a fault or a defect, to send a RDI

to inform the other MEPs, belonging to the same MA, of the presence of this Defect. The advantages

of this procedure are to avoid multiple Alarms created by the same cause and to be able to check

the status of other Remote MEPs. This RDI information is reported in the Continuity Check Message.

• ALFOplus: this feature is present in ALFOplus equipment and the presence of this alarm can be

checked as well in the Remote MEPs screen on the equipment.

Page 55: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 55/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 53

OAM example with ALFOplus

As an example, let’s consider a network where a sequence of 18 SIAE ALFOplus Radio links is deployed. In

this case a Maintenance Domain, a VLAN and a Maintenance association have to be defined. The VLAN car-

ring the traffic has to be added in the VLAN table of each equipment.

• ALFOplus: in SIAE ALFOplus equipment one MaintenanceDomain can be specified. At each end of 

the Maintenance Domain two MEPs (Maintenance End Point) will be specified. The MEPs are “mark-ers” that defies the end of a domain and are in charge of originating OAM frames. In a domain also

MIPs (Maintenance Intermediate Points) can be specified. The MIPs are passive check-points. The

MEPs and MIPs configurations are discussed in details in the following points. The choice of the do-

main and the Domain Label (name) is left to the user. Particular attention must be paid to use the

same MD label in each equipment where the MD is specified, i.e. different equipment with same

value of MD domain but different MD labels belongs to different Domains.

Fig.18 - Hierarchical structure of Maintenance Domains

Customer

Service

Provider

Operator 1

Operator 2

AccessNetwork

Operator 1Core Network

AccessNetwork

MEP

CE PE CEPE

Operator 2Core Network

MEP

MEP MIP MIP MEP

MEP

MEP

MEP MEPMIP MIP

High Level

Low Level

Page 56: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 56/174

54ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

• A Maintenance Association (MA) is one association which correlates the VLAN to the MD in which

the MEPs and MIPs have to be defined.

ALFOplus: when a specified traffic needs to be mentioned, then it is necessary to relay the VLAN to

a Domain and to the corresponding MEPs or MIPs through the MA. Before creating the Maintenance

Association, the VLAN, either S-VLAN or C-VLAN, has to be specified in the VLAN Table. In each

SIAE equipment it is possible to set up to 32 different MA. Particular attention must be paid to usethe same MA label in each equipment where the MA is specified, i.e. different MA labels on the same

VLAN correspond to different MA associations.

• At the Edge of a MD there are MEPs (Maintenance End Points) and in the middle there could be MIPs

(Maintenance Intermediate Points). MEPs are the units in charge of managing the CFM to correctly

monitor the status of the Ethernet service provided. MIPs are passive check-points that answer to

pollings coming from MEPs. MEPs will forward OAM messages coming from higher domains and will

discard OAM messages generated from lower domains.

Two MEPs at the end of the chains and a variable number of MIPs in the middle has to be defined with

Continuity Check Message (CCM) enabled.

In case of defect or Ethernet problem, the Continuity Check Message will result in an “Inactive” status trig-

gering one Alarm. By logging on one MEP it is sufficient to configure the Loopback message, and Link Trace

Message correctly detects the location of the Bottleneck or defect related to this traffic. If more than one

VLAN is present then more than one MAC has to be defined.

6.5.3 Power supply and cable

ALFOplus unit is compatible with standard POE + IEEE 802.at (with exceeding maximum power). Power

supply can be provided at the main port (GE) or at an auxiliary separated connector.

Power supply must be at least 33V. As critical application example, 2 pairs of CAT-5e cable (AWG 24 - 8.4

Ohm) allow the power supply on a 100m length with at least 40.8V (48V - 15%) only if the consumption

is not higher than 33 W.

- Operating voltage 48Vdc ±15%

- Power consumption (max) 38 W

In any case, for other different needs, a dedicated auxiliary port (5 pin connector) provides power supply

48Volt (see Fig.27). For installation, please use rugged and waterproof cable.

6.5.4 Size

- ALFOplus 256 x 256 x 114 mm (wxhxd) (see Fig.6)

6.5.5 Weights

- ALFOplus < 4.5 kg.

6.5.6 Environmental conditions

- Operating temperature Class ETSI –33 to +55° C

- Weather-proof ODU IP65

- Wind resistance ODU   ≤150 km/h (in operation)

≤200 km/h (survival)

Page 57: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 57/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 55

Fig.19 - ALFOplus GE

   G  e   L   A   N   2

   S  u  r  g  e  p  r  o  t  e  c  t   i  o  n

   &  m  a  g  n  e

  t   i  c  s

   M  a   i  n   D   C   /   D   C ,

 

   A  u  x   D   C   /   D   C

 

   S   W   D

   F   P   G

   A

   G  e   L   A   N   1

   D   A

   D   A

 

   P   W

   A   D   C

 

   D   E   M

   A   D   C

   A   D   C

   P   W   M

 

   M   i  c  r  o  c  o  n  t  r  o   l   l  e  r

   A  u  x

   P  w  r   S  u  p  p   l  y

   F   i   l  t  e

   R   A   M

   S   S   D

   V  g  a

   V  g  a

   °   C

   B   B   P  :   b  a  s  e   b  a  n   d  p  r  o  c  e  s  s  o  r

   T   R   X  :   I   F  a  n   d   R   F  t  r  a  n  s  c  e   i  v  e  r

   R   A   M

   C   O   N   N

   M   I   I

   A   D   C

   S  u  r  g  e  p  r

  o  t  e  c  t   i  o  n ,

  m  a  g  n  e  t   i  c

  s ,

   P  o  e  s  p   l   i  t  t  e  r

   Q   S   P   I

   G   M   I   I

   G   M   I   I

   2  x   S  y  n  c

   F   i   l  t  e

   F   i   l  t  e  r

   F   i   l  t  e

   L   O

   L   O

   M   O   D

   D  o  w  n  c  o  n  v  e  r  t  e  r ,

   A  g  c

Page 58: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 58/174

56ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Fig.20 - ALFOplus GO

 

   M  a   i  n   D   C   /   D   C ,

 

   A  u  x   D   C   /   D   C

   S   W   D

   F   P   G   A

   D   A   C

   M   O   D

   L   O

   A   D   C

 

   D  o  w  n

  c  o  n  v  e  r  t  e  r ,

   A  g  c

   D   E   M

   A   D   C

   M   i  c  r  o  c  o  n  t  r  o   l   l  e  r

 

   P  w  r   S  u  p  p   l  y

   F   i   l  t  e  r

   R   A   M

 

   S   S   D 

   °   C

   B   B   P  :   b  a  s  e   b  a  n   d  p  r  o  c  e  s  s  o  r 

   T   R   X  :

   I   F  a  n   d   R   F  t  r  a  n  s  c  e   i  v  e  r

   R   A   M

 

   A   D   C

 

   G  e   L   A   N   1   (   S   F   P   1   0   0   0   B  a  s  e   X   )

 

   G   M   I   I

   M   I   I

   Q   S   P   I

   P   H   Y

   G   M   I   I

   G   M   I   I

   A   D   C

   V  g  a

   V  g  a   P

   W   M

   P   W   M

   C   O   N   N .

   D   A   C

   F   i   l  t  e  r

   F   i   l  t  e  r

   F   i   l  t  e  r

   L   O

   G  e   L   A   N   2  

Page 59: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 59/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 57

Section 3.INSTALLATION

7 INSTALLATION OF ALFOPLUS SYSTEM

7.1 GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLA-TION

ALFOplus equipment is a full-outdoor IP Ethernet radio link system, for transport capacity up to 500 Mbit/s, designed to establish LAN-LAN connections. For the details related to the actual used frequency band

refer to the label on the equipment.

The system is provided with an integrated antenna; however, in case integrated antenna is not used, it

should be connected to an antenna conforming to the requirements of ETSI EN 302 217-4-2 for the rele-

vant frequency band.

  This equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.

Class 2 radio equipment subject to Authorisation of use. The equipment can operate only at the fre-

quencies authorised by the relevant National Authority.

The deployment and use of this equipment shall be made in agreement with the national regulation

for the Protection from Exposure to Electromagnetic Field.

The symbol indicates that, within the European Union, the product is subject to separate collec-

tion at the product end-of-life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For more

information, please contact the relevant supplier for verifying the procedure of correct disposal.

 

Page 60: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 60/174

58ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

The ALFOplus radio system is made up of an outdoor unit, protected by a metallic shield. The mechanical

structure complies with IEC48 and DIN41494 standards.

Compliance to electromagnetic compatibility is guaranteed through the following precautionary measures:

• during the design phase

- use of protection circuits against electrical dischargers- use of filters on the power supply input circuits against noise propagating on the power supply

wires

• during the installation phase

- use of shielded cables

- use of ground connections.

The installation phases of the whole system are described in the following paraghaphs.

7.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

• N.2 13mm torque wrench

• N.1 15 mm torque wrench

• N.1 17 mm torque wrench

• N.1 3 mm Allen wrench.

7.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:

• Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

• Installation of the ODU

• ODU grounding.

7.3.1 Standard coupling kit

The standard coupling kit is mounted on ALFOplus by means of four screws.

Coupling kit assembly procedure

See Fig.21 - Put the standard coupling kit on the ODU.

Align the four holes of the coupling kit with the four nut screws on the ODU. Insert and tighten the four

screws.

Page 61: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 61/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 59

7.4 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRAT-ED ANTENNA

7.4.1 ODU (Standard Lock)

Mounting kit 1+0 version

• Centring ring and relevant screws

• M10 bolts

• ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection

Mounting kit 1+1 version

• Centring ring and relevant screws

• M10 bolts for hybrid and ODU mounting

• Hybrid mechanical body

• Polarization twist disk (see Fig.23)

• 2 ODUs with O-rings and devices for ground connection.

7.4.1.1 1+0 ODU with integrated antenna

Install the antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna boxprovided by antenna producer. Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on re-

quested polarization.

After the antenna is installed onto the pole, the ODU must be installed, see Fig.22.

• Position the three holes circular flange (1) on the antenna flange and align the three holes on the

circular flange with the three relevant holes on the antenna flange

• Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws (2) using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2 Nm)

• Screw partially the four M10 bolts (3) on the antenna back plate: each bolt should be tightened to

have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14mm (the thickness of hook, use 15mm spanner)

• Apply silicone grease (e.g. RHODORSIL PATE 4”) to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and

insert in the proper track on the ODU flange

• Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match

the polarization of the antenna feeder:

- vertical polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom left corner

- horizontal polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom right corner

• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach the

ODU to the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the

four bolts

• Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15mm spanner,

torque=46mm)

• Optional: sun cover kit - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by

means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

• The ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the LAN cable.

Page 62: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 62/174

60ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

: Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure waterproof 

IPx5.

7.4.1.2 1+1 ODU with integrated antenna

Install the antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna box

by antenna producer.

Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on requested polarization.

After the antenna has been installed onto the pole, follow the procedure below, see Fig.24

Mounting the hybrid (1) on the back of the antenna:

• Position the three holes circular flange on the antenna flange and align the holes on the circular

flange with the relevant holes on the antenna flange

• Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2mm)

• Prepare the polarization disk (see Fig.23) with the two O-rings: silicone grease e.g RHODORSIL

PATE 4” must be applied to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves; each O-ring must be inserted

in the proper track on each surface of the disk

• Move the marking reference, present on the twister disk, to H or V label of the hybrid flange (an-

tenna side), to set the polarization, as shown in Fig.23 and tighten the four screws (torque value as

in Tab.10)

• Mount the hybrid on the back of the antenna tightening four M10 bolts (2) with crossed method

(first bolt on high position left, second bolt on the opposite side following the diagonal, then do the

same with the other two bolts (see Fig.24)

Mounting each ODU on the hybrid:

• screw partially four 25 mm M10 bolts positioning them in the holes (3) on the hybrid flange (ODU

side): each bolt should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm,

use 15mm spanner

• Apply silicone grease e.g. RHODORSIL PATE 4” to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves andinsert in the proper track on the ODU flange

• Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match

the polarization of the antenna feeder: horizontal polarization must be used, the handle of the OU

is at the bottom right corner

• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach it to

the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the four bolts

on the hybrid

• Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque

= 46 Nm)

• Optional: sun cover kit - insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by

means of the block plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

• Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the Lan cable

: Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure waterproof 

IPX5

• Repeat for the other ODU on the other side.

Tab.10 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 1 Nm

Page 63: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 63/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 61

7.5 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARAT-ED ANTENNA

• Diameter of the pole 60-114 mm

7.5.1 ODU (Standard Lock)

Mounting kit 1+0 version

• Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)

• 1 antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency, with relevant screws

• M10 25mm bolts for ODU mounting

• ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection

Mounting kit 1+1 version

• Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)

• M10 25mm bolts for hybrid and ODUs mounting

• Hybrid mechanical body

• Polarization twist disk (see Fig.23)

• 2 ODUs with O-rings and devices for ground connection.

Page 64: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 64/174

62ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

7.5.1.1 1+0 ODU with separated antenna

See Fig.25.

• Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four

130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15mm spanner, torque =

46Nm).

• Fix the antenna side flange (4) with the proper screws (in Fig.25 the antenna flange is shown in two

different positions depending on the polarization), the screw holes side is the side where the

waveguide must be installed.

• On the supporting plate, on the opposite side respect to the antenna flange just mounted, insert in

holes (5) on the supporting plate the four 25mm M10 bolts (3): screw them partially, each bolt

should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm (the thickness of 

hook (4), use 15mm spanner).

• Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODORSIL PATE 4’’) to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and

insert it in the proper track on the ODU flange.

• Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the supporting plate and align the ODU to match

the polarization of the antenna flange:

- vertical polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom left corner

- horizontal polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom right corner

• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach the

ODU to the supporting plate in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the

four bolts

• Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque

=46 Nm)

• Optional: sun cover kit - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by

means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

• The ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the Lan cable

: Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure waterproof IPX5

7.5.1.2 1+1 ODU with separated antenna

See Fig.26.

• Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four

130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15 mm spanner, torque = 46

Nm)

• Move the marking reference, present on the twister disk, to H or V label of the hybrid flange (an-

tenna side), to set the polarization as shown in Fig.23 and tighten the four screws (torque value as

in Tab.10)

• Mount the hybrid on the supporting plate (1), thightening four M10 bolts (5) with method cross (first

bolt on high left position, second bolt on opposite side following the diagonal, then do the same with

the other two bolts (see Fig.26)

Mounting each ODU on the hybrid:

• Screw partially four 25 mm M10 bolts positioning them in the holes (7) on the hybrid flange (ODU

side): each bolt should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm,

use 15 mm spanner

• Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODORSIL PATE 4” to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and in-

sert in the proper track on the ODU flange

• Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match

the polarization of the antenna feeder: horizontal polarization must be used, the handle of the ODUis at the bottom right corner

Page 65: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 65/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 63

• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach it to

the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the four bolts

on the hybrid

• Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque

= 46 Nm)

• Optional: sun cover kit - insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by

means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

• Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the Lan cable

• Repeat for the other ODU on the other side

: Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure waterproof 

IPX5

7.5.1.3 Waveguide towards the antenna

After having installed the ODU in 1+0 configuration or in 1+1 configuration, the waveguide towards the

antenna must be installed.

• 1+0: the waveguide must be fixed to the antenna flange on the supporting plate of the ODU. In

case of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding can damage the waveguide, see Tab.11 for details.

• 1+1: the waveguide must be fixed to the hybrid. In case of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding

can damage the waveguide, see Tab.11 for details.

Page 66: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 66/174

64ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

7.6 GROUNDING

The ODU must be connected to ground with the available grounding bolt and eyelet terminal, making ref-

erence to details of Fig.21.

Tab.11 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Frequency

Bending radius

without rebending

mm (inch)

E-plane a 

a. Bending E-plane

Bending radius

without rebending

mm (inch)

H-plane b

b. Bending H-plane

Bending radius

with rebending

mm (inch)

E-plane a.

Bending radius

with rebending

mm (inch)

H-plane b.

15 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

18 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

23 GHz 110 (4,3) 230 (9,1) 130 (5,1) 250 (9,9)

38 GHz 80 (3,1) 140 (5,5) 90 (3,6) 150 (5,9)

Rmin/EBending E-plane

(short side of the section)

Rmin/HBending H-plane

(long side of the section)

Page 67: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 67/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 65

Fig.21 - ODU ASN with standard coupling flange

O-ring

Coupling kit

Page 68: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 68/174

66ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Fig.22 - 1+0 ODU installation

3

1

2

Page 69: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 69/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 67

Fig.23 - Polarization disk

Reference

Page 70: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 70/174

68ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Fig.24 - 1+1 ODU installation

3

1

2

Page 71: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 71/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 69

Fig.25 - 1+0 antenna flange

4

3

4

1

2

5

114-60

Page 72: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 72/174

70ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Fig.26 - 1+1 antenna flange

       3

       1

       2

       4

       7

       5

       6

Page 73: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 73/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 71

7.7 USER CONNECTORS

ALFOplus provides two Amphenol connectors which guarantee Ethernet port compatibility for both version:

Gigabit electrical and optical.

: To avoid losing the airtightness on Amphenol connector, leave a cable straight for 20cm before bend-ing the cable. This secures waterproof test IPX5.

The section area of the cable must be > than 35 mm2.

Accessories available at the moment of printing:

• F03594 cable for auxiliary power force (see Fig.27)

• F03608 2xM12 5P pointing cable (see Fig.28)

• P20032 RJ45 full outdoor conn. kit key down

• P04185 female straight 5 pin M12 shielded connector

• M02472 data cable CAT5e for outdoor

The auxiliary 5 pin circular connector has various functions and it is used when:

• the power over Ethernet injection through the data Lan cable is not available and it is necessary a

direct access to the radio

• during the alignment of antenna (remember to enable Received Signal Strength Indicator  in Equi-

pment Menu - General Preset RSSI)

• in case of emergency, if ALFOplus IP address is unknown, connect it with Serial Console 1, as shown

in Fig.27, using hyperterminal 115200 8, N, 1 and press any button to access at the login.

It is recommended to set RSSI as Disable, not to overload CPU.

: Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure waterproof 

IPX5

Page 74: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 74/174

72ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Fig.27 - F03594 cable

    W    H    I    T    E    /    B    R    O    W    N

W

H

T

B

O

W

N

    4    B    L    A    C    K

4

B

A

    2  -    12

1

    2  -    22

2

    2  -    42

4

    2  -    32

3

    F    R    O

    M

F

O

    T    OT

O

    C    O    U    R    S    E

C

    1  -    21

2

    1  -    31

3

    3  -    A    1

3

A

    3  -    A    3

3

A

    2  -    52

5

    1  -    51

5

    3  -    A    2

3

A

    8    R    E    D

8

R

D

    O    R    A    N    G    E

O

       C       O       L       O       U       R       S

C

O

    W    H    I    T    E    /    O    R    A    N    G    E

W

H

T

O

    B    L    U    E

B

U

    G    R    E    E    N

G

N

    B    R    O    W    N

B

O

W

N

    W    H    I    T    E    /    B    L    U    E

W

H

T

B

U

    W    H    I    T    E    /    G    R    E    E    N

W

H

T

G

N

    T    H    E    R    M    O    F    I    T

T

H

M

O

T

    P    I    P    E

P

P

    T    H    E    R    M    O    F    I    T

T

H

M

O

T

    P    I    P    E

P

P

    T    H    E    R    M    O    F    I    T

T

H

M

O

T

    P    I    P    E

P

P

    T    H    E    R    M    O    F    I    T

T

H

M

O

T

    P    I    P    E

P

P

    F    0    3    5    9    4

F

    R    E    DR

D

    B    L    A    C    K

B

A

8

3

6

2

1

4

7

    V   +V

    V  -V

    A    1A

    A    2A

    A    3A

Page 75: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 75/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 73

Fig.28 - F03608 cable

  s  e  e   N .   B .

s

N

B

   F  -  -  -  -  -

F

    W   I   R   E   S   C   O   N   N   E   C   T   I   O   N

 

W

I

R

C

O

   S   I   D   E   E   N   L   A   R   G   E   D   V   I   E   W

S

D

E

V

E

W

    W   I   R   E   S   C

   O   N   N   E   C   T   I   O   N

 

W

I

R

C

O

   S   I   D   E   E   N   L

   A   R   G   E   D   V   I   E   W

S

D

E

V

E

W

5

4

3

2

1

5

1

4

3

2

   R   E   D

R

   B   L   A   C   K

B

   N .   B .   2

N

B

2

   N .   B .   2

N

B

2

   N .   B .   1

N

B

1

   N .   B .   1  -   S   T   R   I   P   T   H   E   C   A   B   L   E   R   E   S   P   E   C   T   I   N   G   T   H   E

   D   I   M   E   N   S   I   O   N   S   H   O   W    I

   N   T   H   E   D   R   A   W   I   N   G

N

B

1

S

P

T

C

R

N

T

D

M

O

S

W

 

N

T

D

W

I

N

   N .   B .   2  -   C   A   B   L   E   H   E   A   T   S   H   R   I   N   K   A   B   L   E

N

B

2

C

H

S

N

   W   H   I   T   E   /   B   R   O   W   N  +   B   R   O   W   N

W

H

T

B

W

N

B

W

N

   W   H   I   T   E   /   O   R   A   N   G

   E  +   O   R   A   N   G   E

W

H

T

O

+

O

   W   H   I   T   E   /   B   L   U   E

W

H

T

B

U

4

6

4

5

7

2

2

   0 ,   6  m  m

   (   B   l  u  e   )

0

6

m

m

 

B

u

   0   6  m  m

   (   G  r  e  e  n   )

0

m

m

 

G

e

   *   3   R   E   D

*

R

   *   2   B   L   A   C   K

*

B

   C   F   1  -   4

C

4

   C   F   1  -   5

C

5

   C   O   U   R   S   E

C

   T   OT

O

   P  a  r  t

P

   R  e   f .

R

   F   R   O   M

F

   N   O   T   E   S

N

   B   L   U   E

B

U

   W   H   I   T   E

   /   G   R   E   E   N

W

H

T

G

   C   M   2  -   1

C

M

1

   C   M   2  -   2

C

M

2

   C   M   2  -   3

C

M

3

   C   M   2  -   4

C

M

4

   C   F   1  -   1

C

1

   C   F   1  -   2

C

2

   C   F   1  -   3

C

3

   C   F   1  -   4

C

4

   C   F   1  -   5

C

5

   C   M   2  -   5

C

M

5

   C   M   2

C

M

1

   C   F   1

C

   C   O   U   R   S   E

C

   T   OT

O

   P  a  r  t

P

   R  e   f .

R

   *   1*

   F   R   O   M

F

   C   O   L

   O   U   R   S

C

O

   N .   B .  -   P   A   R   T   M   U   S   T   B   E   L   A   B   E   L   L   E   D   W   I   T   H   H   O   T   T   I   G

   H   T   E   N   I   N   G   R   I   N   G ,   D   I   S   P   L   A   Y   I   N   G  :

N

B

P

M

B

L

W

I

T

H

T

G

N

R

N

D

S

N

 

  -   P   A   R   T   N   U   M   B   E   R   /   R   E   V   I   S   I   O   N  ;

 

P

N

R

S

O

 

  -   M   A   N   U   F   A   C   T   U   R   E   R   I   D   (   R   E   G .   M   A   R   K   O   R   I   N   I   T   I   A   L   )  ;

 

M

D

R

G

M

O

N

T

A

 

  -   M   A   N   U   F   A   C   T   U   R   I   N   G   D   A   T   E   (   W   E   E   K   /   Y   E   A   R   )  ;

 

M

N

D

W

E

Y

 

  -   E   L   E   C   T   R   I   C   A   L   T   E   S   T   P   R   O   V   E   N   (   "   T   E   "   M   A   R   K   ) .

 

E

C

T

P

T

M

2

   N .   B .   1

N

B

1

6

   N .   B .   2

N

B

2

4

   3   53

4

   6   06

   1   5   3   0

1

  +   2   0+     0 

0

   -   G   E   T   V   A   L   U   E   F   R   O   M    L

   A   S   T   D   I   G   I   T   S

   O   F   P   A   R   T   D   E   S   C   R   I   P   T   I   O   N

 

G

V

F

D

G

O

P

D

O

Page 76: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 76/174

74ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Fig.29 - ALFOplus connectors

Page 77: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 77/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 75

Section 4.LINE-UP

8 LINE-UP OF ALFOPLUS SYSTEM

8.1 GENERAL

The line-up phases of the ALFOplus radio link are:

• switching on the two equipment

• alarm leds check

• optimizing antenna orientation

• insertion into telecontrol and reachability of far-end terminal

• check of Ethernet connections

• quality evaluation with performance monitoring

Operations involving the use of SCT/WebLCT are roughly described here. For further details please refer

to software manual.

8.2 SWITCH ON

Checks to be performed before switching on the unit are:

• power supply voltage - the power supply must be 48 Vdc ±15%.

• antenna presence - check the connection between ODU output flange and antenna.

If everything is correct, switch on the ODU.

Page 78: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 78/174

76ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

8.3 ALARM LED CHECK

On the rear panel of ODU unit there is a transparent plastic window to see the status of an internal LED

dedicated to show unit alarms. Further information about ALFOplus alarms can be found onto the chapter

 “ALFOplus alarms and troubleshooting”.Colours status:

• Red light

- ON – An internal alarm is active. Connect SCT/WebLCT for troubleshooting

- Flashing – An external alarm is active.

• Green light

- Flashing – No radio connection with remote ODU. In this case, if remote equipment is on and

properly oriented, it is necessary to check frequency, attenuation and link identifier (see parag.

 “First configuration.....”) and to evaluate the alarm list with SCT/WebLCT software

- ON – the radio connection with remote ODU is active.

8.4 CONNECTION PROCEDURE

Connection between PC and ALFOplus can be made directly or through a switch.

First connection (you know IP address)

1 with SCT or browser (internet explorer) type IP address stored previously (Factory Default are

172.20.254.14 ODU L and 172.20.255.15 ODU H)

- User: system

- Password: siaemicr

2 after connection it’s possible to modify IP address, etc.....

Emergency connection (you don’t know IP address)

1 Assign a static IP address (see Fig.31) to PC and in “Local area connection properties” enable the

box “Show icon in notification area when connected” (see Fig.30)

2 Connect your PC directly to ALFOplus

3 Start SCT, connect using Local Area Network, press connect button, insert 172.20.253.13 (“rescue

connection” address) IP address, user: System, Password: siaemicr, without pressing “OK” button

4 Switch off ALFOplus and turn on again

5 Wait some sec until the LAN symbol shows LAN connected and press OK button in SCT

6 In “Rescue Connection” mode it is possible to set or to recover the values for management normal

access.

Fig.30 - Local Area Connection

Page 79: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 79/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 77

Fig.31 - IP address setting

8.5 FIRST CONFIGURATION

To activate a radio link it is necessary to program the ODU in some basic items listed in the following:

• Local Tx frequency

• Remote Tx frequency

• Local Tx power

• Remote Tx power

• Link identifier, Link Type (Modulation&Capacity): same parameters on local and on remote unit

Connect the PC to serial input of ALFOplus (Service connector) and start the communication towards the

ODU microcontroller with SCT/WebLCT program.

Tx frequency setting

See Fig.32. Into SCT/WebLCT at position:

• Equipment menu

• Radio Branch window

• Settings card: in this card you have to select Tx frequency; Rx frequency is shown and is set au-

tomatically.

Tx frequency to be set at remote radio is equal to local Rx frequency. Tx frequency can be set on single

unit or, if link is on service, on whole link. Please set the frequency according to your license.

Tx power setting

See Fig.32. Into SCT/WebLCT at position:

• Equipment menu

Page 80: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 80/174

78ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

• Radio Branch window

• Powers card: in this card you have to set Tx Level Max; in this card ATPC thresholds can be set:

Rx Level Min, Rx Level Max.

The same at remote ODU.

Link Type (Modulation and Capacity) and Link identifier setting

See Fig.33.

Into SCT/WebLCT at position:

• Equipment menu

• Mod. Cap/Link ID card

• In Mod. Cap/Link ID card, you can select Capacity and Modulation and set a Link Identifier.

Fig.32 - Frequency and power setting

Page 81: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 81/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 79

Fig.33 - Link general setting (Modulation&Capacity, Local Link ID)

8.6 OPTIMIZING ANTENNA ALIGNMENT WITH RX MEASUREMENT

When radio link is on, antenna alignment can be optimized. Antenna alignment optimization is performeddepending on the Rx signal power at local and remote equipment and evaluating both local and remote S/

N value maximizing them.

There are two possibilities to see the Rx signal power level:

• through SCT/WebLCT software

• through a voltmeter connected to Service connector on the ODU.

In order to get the Rx signal power level by means of software, connect the PC to serial input of ALFOplus

(Service connector) and start the communication towards the ODU microcontroller with SCT/WebLCT su-

pervisory program.

Into SCT/WebLCT:

• Main menu (first window opened after login)

• The card (or other cards of equipment menu), displays on right top the Rx signal power level seeFig.34

Page 82: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 82/174

80ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

If you’re using a voltmeter the Rx signal power level is available on the Service connector of ODU, the

measurement can be performed with a proper cable.

Following this last procedure, the voltage you’re reading with the voltmeter is proportional to Rx power

level, refer to Tab.12.

Tab.12 - Voltage measured in auxiliary port

Rx signal power level is the most important item to optimize the antenna alignment, but in a situation of 

interference Rx level can be good, BER acceptable but BER margin low. This means that when Rx fields will

decrease then BER will increase fast. The situation can be easily shown with SCT/WebLCT software looking

at Signal Quality level.

Into SCT/WebLCT Software select:

• Equipment menu

• S/N Meas. card (see Fig.35)

Refer to the “ALFOplus operator” manual for parameter evaluation.

Received Signal (dBm) Signal Output (V) Error (dB)

-20 4.68 ±5

-30 3.51 ±5

-40 2.34 ±3

-50 1.17 ±3

-60 0 ±3

-70 -1.17 ±3

-80 -2.34 ±3

-90 -3.51 ±5

-100 -4.68 ±5

Formula RSSI=Offset + (Signal/Output)/Slope

Slope (V/dB) 0.117

Offset (dBm) -60

Page 83: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 83/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 81

Fig.34 - Main menu with Rx signal power level

Fig.35 - S/N measurement monitoring

Antenna aiming

Antenna aiming devices allow to perform the following adjustments with respect to the starting aiming po-

sition:

- horizontal ± 15° operating on the nut (3) shown in Fig.37, only after having loosen

the nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.38.

- vertical ± 15° operating on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) shown in Fig.37only after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.38 and (4) of Fig.37

For adjustment from 0° to +30° extract nut (1) Fig.38 and position it in

hole (4), extract nut (2) Fig.38 and position it in hole (6). Operate on

vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of 

Fig.38 and (4) of Fig.37.

For adjustment from 0° to –30° extract nut (1) of Fig.38 and position it in hole

(3), extract nut (2) of Fig.38 and position it in hole (5). Operate on vertical

adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.38

and (4) of Fig.37.

For vertical adjustment some markers, every 10°, are available on support. The bigger marker gives 0°

starting aiming position. Once the optimum aiming position is obtained, tighten firmly the four nuts (1),

(2), (11) of Fig.38 and (4) of Fig.37 for vertical adjustment and the four nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.38

for horizontal adjustment. Tighten with 15 mm wrench and 32 Nm torque.

- grounding The grounding can be connected with the available bolt spring washer andflat washers as shown.

Page 84: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 84/174

82ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

8.7 ODU ACCESSING AND REMOTE MANAGEMENT

Local ALFOplus ODU and its remote ODU can be accessed at Service connector or LAN1 ports. Once the

radio link has been configured, connect to the local ODU and specify the network password too. SCT/We-

bLCT window shows also a field referred to the remote ODU:• double click on this field -> remote ODU is opened in monitor mode

• if it’s necessary to act on remote ODU you have to login on remote ODU (IP address is known be-

cause you can read it from monitor windows).

8.8 FIRMWARE

The releases of ALFO firmware, downloadable by the operator, are listed in Fig.36.

Using SCT/WebLCT Software open Main menu, select Software info & Maintenance and in the window

shown in Fig.36 select Equipment Firmware and Download SW Setup.

Downloading time depends on connection used between PC and ALFOplus.

Further informations can be found on software manual of ALFOplus equipment.

Fig.36 - Software download procedure

Page 85: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 85/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 83

8.9 ADAPTIVE MODULATION

ALFOplus ODU’s implement an error free adaptive modulation algorithm to improve the system gain when

the quality of the received signal become insufficient to guarantee an error free link.

The thresholds for ACM are shown in the Tab.13.

Tab.13 - ACM switching thresholds

7M Physical ModePower

(Estim.)

BER 10-6

(Estim.)

Up-shift a

(Estim.)

Margin

(Estim.)

Up-shiftb

(Estim.)

Margin

(Estim.)

4SQAM 0 6.4 13.2 5 13.2

4QAM 0 8.2 17.7 5 20.2 5.0

16SQAM -2.5 12.7 19.6 5 19.6 7.5

16QAM -2.5 14.6 22.2 5 23.5 5.0

32QAM -3.75 17.2 24.7 5 24.5 6.3

64QAM -3.5 19.7 27.8 5 27.8 4.8

128QAM -3.5 22.8 31 5 31.6 5.0

256QAM -4.125 26 34.1 5 34.1 5.6

512QAM -4.125 29.1 37.3 5 38.2 5.0

1KQAM -5 32.3 5 5.9

14M Physical ModePower

(Estim.)

BER 10-6

(Estim.)

Up-shift a.

(Estim.)

Margin

(Estim.)

Up-shiftb.

(Estim.)

Margin

(Estim.)

4SQAM 0 5.8 13.2 13.2

4QAM 0 8.2 17.6 5.0 20.1 5.0

16SQAM -2.5 12.6 19.5 5.0 19.5 7.5

16QAM -2.5 14.5 22 5.0 23.3 5.0

32QAM -3.75 17 25.7 5.0 25.5 6.3

64QAM -3.5 19.7 27.7 6.0 27.7 5.8

128QAM -3.5 22.7 30.8 5.0 31.4 5.0

256QAM -4.125 25.8 33.9 5.0 33.9 5.6

512QAM -4.125 28.9 37.2 5.0 38.1 5.0

1KQAM -5.0 32.2 5.0 5.9

28M Physical ModePower

(Estim.)

BER 10-6

(Estim.)

Up-shift a.

(Estim.)

Margin

(Estim.)

Up-shiftb.

(Estim.)

Margin

(Estim.)

4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7

4QAM 0 8.2 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5

16SQAM -2.5 12.6 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0

16QAM -2.5 14.4 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5

32QAM -3.75 16.8 25.6 4.5 25.4 5.8

64QAM -3.5 19.6 27.2 6.0 27.2 5.8

128QAM -3.5 22.7 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5

Page 86: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 86/174

84ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Fig.37 - Vertical and horizontal adjustment

256QAM -4.125 25.7 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1

512QAM -4.125 28.8 36.5 4.5 37.4 4.5

1KQAM -5 32 4.5 4.5

56M Physical Mode Power(Estim.)

BER 10-6

(Estim.)Up-shift

a.

(Estim.)Margin

(Estim.)Up-shift

b.

(Estim.)Margin

(Estim.)

4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7

4QAM 0 8.2 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5

16SQAM -2.5 12.6 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0

16QAM -2.5 14.4 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5

32QAM -3.75 16.8 24.6 4.5 24.4 5.8

64QAM -3.5 19.6 27.2 5.0 27.2 4.8

128QAM -3.5 22.7 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5

256QAM -4.125 25.7 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1

512QAM -4.125 28.8 36.5 4.5 37.4 4.5

1KQAM -5.0 32 4.5 5.4

a. Up-shift thresholds in case of constant output power. Reference mode 256QAM.

b. Up-shift thresholds in case of output power depending on current physical mode - Reference mode 4QAM.

12

34

5

Page 87: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 87/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 85

Fig.38 - Antenna aiming block

2

13

5

4

69

10

87

11

15 mm wrench32 Nm torque

15 mm wrench32 Nm torque

15 mm wrench32 Nm torque

15 mm wrench32 Nm torque

Page 88: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 88/174

86ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Page 89: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 89/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 87

Section 5.MAINTENANCE

9 ALFOPLUS ALARMS AND LOOPS

9.1 GENERAL

A radio link generating alarm requires troubleshooting.

The troubleshooting of the ALFOplus can be organized on the basis of alarms.

Basic alarms come from LEDs on the equipment and all the active alarms can be observed through SCT/

WebLCT.

In this document is present ALFOplus alarm list and a description of the loop facilities provided into the

equipment.

9.2 ALARMS

Alarms can be pointed out through unit LEDs and/or through SCT/WebLCT software.

9.2.1 Alarm indications

On the back of the ALFOplus a small plastic window shows the status of an internal LED.

The information provided is:

• Red light

- ON – An internal alarm is active. Connect SCT/WebLCT for troubleshooting.

- Flashing – An external alarm is active.

Page 90: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 90/174

88ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

• Green light

- Flashing – No radio connection with remote ODU. In this case, if remote equipment is on and

properly oriented, it is necessary to evaluate the Alarm list with SCT/WebLCT software.

- ON – Radio connection with remote ODU is active.

9.2.2 SCT/WebLCT displayed alarms

ALFOplus TRU is microprocessor controlled and all the alarms are displayed through SCT/WebLCT program

running on a PC. Alarms are divided in classes to refer to a particular functionality and are characterized

by programmable severity.

Alarms, with class and a short description, are listed into Tab.14.

In the following you can find a class list and the item they describe:

• BASE BAND – Hardware failure in BBP-GE/GO unit

• COMMON – Failure or status relevant to whole equipment

• ETH LAN - Failure on Ethernet traffic

• P.M. G.828 – Performance monitoring on signal quality

• P.M. Rx Power – Performance monitoring on received signal

• P.M. Tx Power – Performance monitoring on transmitted signal

• Plug-in module - Alarm on plug-in device

• RADIO - Alarm on Tx/Rx section of ALFOplus

• SETS - Synchronisation alarm or status

• SNTP - Server lost (unavailable in this SW version)

• Unit - Hardware or software unit alarm

Tab.14 - Alarms

Class WebLCT name Description

BASE BANDBase Band Modulation Fail Alarm Alarm on baseband transmitting side

Base Band Demodulation Fail Alarm Alarm on baseband receiving side

COMMON

Equip Rmon Alarm Unavailable in this SW version

Equip Mngt Cable Fail Alarm Alarm on supervisory cable

Equip Manual Operation At least one manual operation on

ETH LAN

Eth Lan Phy Lacp Protocol Down Unavailable in this SW version

Eth Lan Phy Master Slave Configura-

tion Fault

Autonegotiation GBit Frame configuration

failed

Eth Lan Phy Link Loss Forwarding Link loss in remote port

Eth Lan Phy Autonegotiation Autonegotiation failed

Eth Lan Phy Sync Synchronization not aligned

Eth Lan Phy Link Loss Loss of Ethernet signal

Page 91: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 91/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 89

P.M. G.828

pm G828 - 24H SepAlarm

Quality measurements on radio signal re-

ceived a

pm G828 - 15M SepAlarm

pm G828 - UAS Alarm

pm G828 - 24H Ses Alarm

pm G828 - 24H ES Alarm

pm G828 - 15M Ses Alarm

pm G828 - 15M ES Alarm

P.M. Rx Powerpm RxPwr - 24H Rlts Alarm

Rx Power measurements on radio signal re-

ceived a.pm RxPwr - 15M Rlts Alarm

P.M. Tx Powerpm TxPwr - 24H Rlts Alarm

Tx Power measurements on radio signal

transmitted a.pm TxPwr - 15M Rlts Alarm

Plug-in module

Plug-in Los Alarm

Unavailable in this SW versionPlug-in Module Alarm

Plug-in Module Mismatch Alarm

Plug-in Status Change

RADIO

Radio Config Mismatch Set Mod/Cap mismatch on radio link

BaseBand Rx Quality Low Warning Received signal quality degraded

BaseBand Rx Quality Low Alarm Insufficient received signal quality

Radio Rt If Fail Intermediate frequency alarmed

Radio Rt Vco Fail Voltage Controlled Oscillator failure

Radio Tx Power Alarm Transmitted power below the fixed threshold

Radio Rx Power Low Alarm Received power below the fixed threshold

BaseBand Rx Alarm Set Low received power on base band

Radio Invalid Frequency Alarm Set Wrong frequency on radio link

Radio Equip Ber Sync Loss AlarmBit error rate/Syncloss on received radio sig-

nal

Radio Equip Reduced Capacity AlarmCapacity is reduced respect to the one with

reference modulation

Radio Equip Link Telemetry Fail Alarm Telemetry failed to radio link missing

Radio Equip Link ID Alarm Wrong Link ID received

SETS

Timing Sync Active Status Timing Sync is active

Timing Sync Drift Alarm Selected Synch bad quality

Timing Sync Los Alarm Selected Synch missing

Timing Generator Holdover Status Equipment in holdover status

Timing Generator Free Running Sta-

tusEquipment in Free Running status

Timing Generator T0 Fail Alarm T0 synch missing

SNTP Sntp Client Unicast Server Lost Unavailable in this SW version

Page 92: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 92/174

90ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Fig.39 - Available loops

Unit

Unit SW Mismatch Alarm SW mismatch detected on the unit

Unit HW Mismatch Alarm HW mismatch detected on the unit

Unit Not Responding Alarm No response from the unit

Unit Missing Alarm Missing condition on the unit

Unit Fail Alarm Failure on the unit

a. Regarding periods of 15 minutes or 24 hours.

ALFO Plus

BBP-GE RADIO

RF Loop

BASE

BANDLOOP

Page 93: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 93/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 91

10 ALFOPLUS MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOT-ING

10.1 GENERAL

In the following pages are listed all the procedures to follow for ALFOplus maintenance.

When corrective maintenance is necessary, a troubleshooting procedure helps the operator to identify the

failure unit to replace it with a spare one.

10.2 MAINTENANCE

Maintenance consists of two stages:

1 periodical checks to be carried out using SCT/WebLCT

2 corrective maintenance.

Periodical checks serve to detect correct radio performance without the presence of any alarm condition.

Corrective maintenance takes place as soon as one or more alarm conditions are in existence. Operationsequence to be carried out is shown in “Troubleshooting” paragraph.

10.2.1 Periodical checks

System routine maintenance consists in a series of routine checks aiming to verify correct operating mode

of an alarm–free system.

These checks are made through SCT/WebLCT program, installed on a PC.

The items to be checked are:

• Tx power (i.e., attenuation value in dB vs. nominal value)

• Rx field (value measured must comply with that resulting from hop calculation)

• S/N (presence of possible interference)

• BER (values measured must comply with hop calculations)

How these operations are carried out is specified in “Line–up” section or, more widely, in ALFOplus software

manual.

Page 94: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 94/174

92ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

10.2.2 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting)

Corrective maintenance starts as soon as one or more alarm indication become active.

Corrective maintenance purpose is to locate the faulty unit and replace it with spare after having verified

that the cause of faulty is not external to the equipment.

Corrective maintenance does not include malfunction due to a wrong or incomplete configuration of the

system or to failure due to alarm indication system itself or any other cause external to the system, i.e.:

cabling damage, main voltage loss, antenna misalignment and propagation problems.

See paragraph 10.3 TROUBLESHOOTING for details.

10.3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Main purpose of troubleshooting is to declare an unit faulty or not.

After this step alarms are caused by bad configuration and/or external causes.

10.3.1 Faulty condition detection

Alarms can be pointed out through unit LEDs and/or through SCT/WebLCT software:

Unit LEDs

Near the circular connector of the ODU it’s shown the status of a LED, which can be green or red. The in-formation provided are:

• Red light

- ON – An internal alarm is active. Connect SCT/WebLCT for troubleshooting.

- Flashing – An external alarm is active.

• Green light

- Flashing – No radio connection with remote ODU. In this case, if remote equipment is on and

properly oriented, it is necessary to evaluate the alarm list with SCT/WebLCT software.

- ON – Radio connection with remote ODU is active.

SCT/WebLCT

Alarms are divided in classes to refer to a particular hardware or software functionality and are character-

ized by their programmable gravity.

A window with alarm classes list is available for local ODU (the unit PC is physically connected to) and for

remote ODU.

The presence of a current alarm is pointed out by SCT/WebLCT program, see software manual.

The presence of an historical alarm is pointed out in the event log window of SCT/WebLCT program (see

Fig.40 and Fig.41).

Page 95: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 95/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 93

10.3.2 Troubleshooting of a faulty unit

Into SCT/WebLCT software, in Equipment menu select View Current Alarm menu.

In this window they are displayed the current alarm and their severity. Depending on which alarm classes

are active, following situation can arise.

ODU alarm classes active

ALFOplus is made up by a single unit, the ODU. This is the minimum spare part.

If one or more of the following conditions occur, the ODU is faulty:

• One or more alarms inside the ODU hardware class are active

• One or more alarms inside ODU link class are active

If the following condition occurs a further investigation is necessary:

• Sw config alarm in ODU software class is active

Every log window has to be inspected. In the window are present additional information about Sw

config alarm; if it is impossible to clear through restart, the unit is not able to work properly and

needs to be tested again in SIAE final test department.

Troubleshooting on remote ODU

With SCT/WebLCT program the alarm on the Remote ODU are displayed the same way as for the local one.

The above described troubleshooting can be carried out for the remote ODU too.

Fig.40 - Current alarm monitoring

Page 96: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 96/174

94ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Fig.41 - Event log window

Page 97: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 97/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 95

Section 6.PROGRAMMING ANDSUPERVISION

11 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION

11.1 GENERAL

ALFOplus is programmed and supervised using a software tool: SCT/WebLCT. This subject is fully described

in the separated software manual.

11.2 SUPERVISION THROUGH ETHERNET

The provided structure for Ethernet traffic defines the management facilities of "ALFOplus" unit.

Page 98: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 98/174

96ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Fig.42 - Traffic management of "ALFOplus" unit

11.2.1 General

In general you suppose that the equipment performs the "host" functionality in an Ethernet network and

that supervisory network follows the traffic routing, eventually separated by "VLAN tag". The management

can be:

• "In-band" by one or both traffic ports (with or without "VLAN tag")

• "Out-of-band" by auxiliary port "Ge LAN2" (without " VLAN tag")

The two modalities can be enabled at the same time, but the IP network address must be shared. If the

"In-band" management by "Ge LAN1" is provided with "VLAN tag", "Ge LAN2" may extend the manage-

ment network (without "VLAN tag") towards other units into the same site.

Supervisory network can be disable selectively line side and radio site.

Local access to the unit must be always guaranteed by "Ge LAN2".

11.2.2 Configurations

The following supervision modalities, associated to the input ports, can be provided:• "In-band" by traffic ports "Ge LAN1" and "Ge LAN2" (with or without "VLAN tag")

• "Out-of-band" by auxiliary port "Ge LAN2" (without "VLAN tag")

In detail, the line ports can be configured as in:

 

Ge LAN1

Ge LAN2

Internal port

SWDSwitcing Device

MicrocontrollerRate adapter

(fpga)

Mgt

Mac

Page 99: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 99/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 97

Tab.15 - Configurations

The two configurations can be enabled at the same time. The transparent connection between "Ge LAN1"

and "Ge LAN2" at different speed could cause undesired congestion situations for the traffic towards the

port with lower speed: this condition must be avoided by means of network dimensions.

The connection between the two ports line side is enabled only when the supervisory network "in-band"

uses a "VLAN tag" dedicated and therefore the traffic is assumed lower than the minimum band of the ports

line side.

Due to management and Ethernet maintenance (OAM), exigencies the controller must know the source

port of received frames and route properly the transmitted frames.

11.2.3 "Transparent in-band" management

This modality allows the access to "ALFOplus" unit via "Ge LAN1" and "Ge LAN2" in the easiest possible

way, with frames without " VLAN tag" and therefore with IP domain shared. This modality can be used if 

the user is IP addresses owner and so the equipment is inserted into a traffic network level 3 (IP routing).

For this reason, the Security management is defined by the operator using the function (Access Control

List).

Fig.43 - Transparent in-band management

In order to limit the visibility of controller to the line side () rather than radio side (), you can enable

or disable the paths indicated. The path () can be enabled only if both line sides are enabled to super-

vision (in-band) and are not in protection configuration (LAG or ELP).

Port management Function

"Disable” The management by "Ge LAN1" can't get access to the

controller

"In-band

The management by "Ge LAN1" can access to the con-

troller. It's configured "VLAN tag" (or absence) of super-

visory network

"Local access only” Ge LAN2" may access only to the local controller. Super-

visory network is not connected to radio side

"In-band” 

The management by "Ge LAN2" can access to the con-

troller. It's configured "VLAN tag" (or absence) of super-

visory network

"Out-of-band” 

 “Ge LAN2" can access to local controller and supervisory

network is connected to radio side using "VLAN stack-

ing" function to separate the traffic

"In-band-drop-node” "Ge LAN2" can access to local controller and the port isconsidered as a node into the supervisory network "in-

band" (with VLAN tag)

 

Ge LAN1

Ge LAN2

CPU

Port based vlan

Payload + MNGT

Page 100: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 100/174

98ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

11.2.4 "VLAN based in-band" management

This procedure allow the access of "ALFOplus" unit by "Ge LAN1" more safely, because the IP domain is

independent of payload traffic through dedicated "VLAN tag" (configurable). This mode can be used when

the user is owner of "VLAN tag" and the equipment is interposed in a level 2 network traffic (switching).

In that case the management routing is obtain to filtering of "VLAN tag".

Fig.44 - VLAN based in-band management

To reduce the visibility of the controller to line side (), radio side () and extent supervision network

() you can enable or disable the paths indicated in filtering "VLAN tag". The path () can be enabled

only if both line ports, are enabled to "In-band" management.

In case of protection configuration through LAG or ELP, the path () cannot be enabled.

11.2.5 "VLAN based In-band" drop node

This particular way allows to introduce the supervision traffic "VLAN based In-band" (mandatory with"VLAN tag") using "Ge LAN2" obligatorily without "VLAN tag". The line ports are linked together using the

filtering "VLAN tag" (set as tagged the default port "Ge LAN2").

Fig.45 - VLAN based In-band drop node

This mode allows the supervision of outdoor units placed in the same site, but excludes the possibility of 

simultaneous monitoring "Out-of-band" in the network.

The insertion direction (on the line and radio side) can be selectively enabling or disabling the paths cor-

responding ( and ). This mode is not available in the case of interfaces in a secure configuration.

Ge LAN1

Ge LAN2

CPU

Vlan map filtering

Ge LAN1

Ge LAN2

CPUMGT

Vlan map filtering Port based vlan

Page 101: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 101/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 99

11.2.6 "Out-of-band" management

This mode allows the access to the local "ALFOplus" unit of frame without "VLAN tag" and the extension of 

the supervision network to the remote terminal. The priority of management traffic is obtained with "VLAN

tag".

In remote terminal the payload and management traffic are again divided. This involves increasing thelength of traffic frame of four bytes.

Fig.46 - Out-of-band management

11.2.7 Configurability

The management mode of equipment affects the Ethernet Channel and on the Switch configuration (RSTP,

OAM, …). Therefore it is important to decide the optimal configuration of traffic Ethernet and management,

to avoid blocking traffic conditions.

11.2.8 Address

The unit uses a single IP address associated at the management port of controller and a single "default

gateway". Depending on the configuration of these addresses are visible from supervision "in-band" and

"Out-of-band".

11.2.9 Restore supervisioning access mode

The “RESTORE OF CPU ACCESS” command is available through Serial port (F03594 cable) via Hypertermi-

nal (115200bps,n,8,1):

• Login use WEBLCT credential

• Type string: lao

This string restores the factory default of port configuration:

• LAN1 disable

• LAN2 local access only

Fe LAN2

CPU CPU

Fe LAN2

Port based vlan Vlan map filtering

Page 102: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 102/174

100ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Page 103: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 103/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 101

Section 7.COMPOSITION

12 COMPOSITION

12.1 GENERALS

This document shows ALFOplus system available versions with the relevant main specifications and char-

acteristics.

12.2 ALFOplus SYSTEM IDENTIFYING LABEL

Different versions are identified by a label. This label contains the main characteristics of the equipment

(see Tab.16).

12.3 AVAILABLE ALFOplus VERSIONS

In Tab.16 you find the available versions with following information:

• Code

• ODU frequency

• Go-return

• RF Subband (L and H)

Page 104: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 104/174

102ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Tab.16 - RF band and RF filter band

Code Description Go-return (MHz) RF/Subband

GB 8606 ODU ALFOplus 11 490/530 11 GHz 1L

GB 8607 ODU ALFOplus 11 490/530 11 GHz 1H

GB 8608 ODU ALFOplus 11 490/530 11 GHz 2L

GB 8609 ODU ALFOplus 11 490/530 11 GHz 2H

GB 8610 ODU ALFOplus 11 490/530 11 GHz 3L

GB 8611 ODU ALFOplus 11 490/530 11 GHz 3H

GB 8612 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 1L

GB 8613 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 1H

GB 8614 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 2L

GB 8615 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 2H

GB 8616 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 3L

GB 8617 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 3H

GB 8618 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 4L

GB 8619 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 4H

GB 8628 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 1L

GB 8629 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 1H

GB 8630 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 2L

GB 8631 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 2H

GB 8632 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 3L

GB 8633 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 3H

GB 8634 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 4L

GB 8635 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 4H

GB 8636 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 5L

GB 8637 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 5H

GB 8646 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 1L

GB 8647 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 1H

GB 8648 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 2L

GB 8649 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 2H

GB 8650 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 3L

GB 8651 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 3H

GB 8652 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 4L

GB 8653 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 4H

GB 8662 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 1L

GB 8663 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 1H

GB 8664 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 2L

GB 8665 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 2H

Page 105: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 105/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 103

GB 8666 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 3L

GB 8667 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 3H

GB 8668 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 4L

GB 8669 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 4H

GB 8690 ODU ALFOplus 15 728 15 GHz 1L

GB 8691 ODU ALFOplus 15 728 15 GHz 1H

GB 8700 ODU ALFOplus 18 1010 18 GHz 1L

GB 8701 ODU ALFOplus 18 1010 18 GHz 1H

GB 8702 ODU ALFOplus 18 1010 18 GHz 2L

GB 8703 ODU ALFOplus 18 1010 18 GHz 2H

GB 8704 ODU ALFOplus 18 1010 18 GHz 3L

GB 8705 ODU ALFOplus 18 1010 18 GHz 3H

GB 8716 ODU ALFOplus 18 1560 18 GHz 1L

GB 8717 ODU ALFOplus 18 1560 18 GHz 1H

GB 8718 ODU ALFOplus 23 1008 23 GHz 1L

GB 8719 ODU ALFOplus 23 1008 23 GHz 1H

GB 8720 ODU ALFOplus 23 1008 23 GHz 2L

GB 8721 ODU ALFOplus 23 1008 23 GHz 2H

GB 8726 ODU ALFOplus 23 1200/1232 23 GHz 1L

GB 8727 ODU ALFOplus 23 1200/1232 23 GHz 1H

GB 8728 ODU ALFOplus 23 1200/1232 23 GHz 2L

GB 8729 ODU ALFOplus 23 1200/1232 23 GHz 2H

GB 8730 ODU ALFOplus 23 1200/1232 23 GHz 3L

GB 8731 ODU ALFOplus 23 1200/1232 23 GHz 3H

GB 8736 ODU ALFOplus 25 1008 25 GHz 1L

GB 8737 ODU ALFOplus 25 1008 25 GHz 1H

GB 8738 ODU ALFOplus 25 1008 25 GHz 2L

GB 8739 ODU ALFOplus 25 1008 25 GHz 2H

GB 8782 ODU ALFOplus 38 1260 38 GHz 1L

GB 8783 ODU ALFOplus 38 1260 38 GHz 1H

GB 8784 ODU ALFOplus 38 1260 38 GHz 2L

GB 8785 ODU ALFOplus 38 1260 38 GHz 2H

GB 9524 ODU ALFOplus 7L 196 7L GHz 1L

GB 9525 ODU ALFOplus 7L 196 7L GHz 1H

GB 9526 ODU ALFOplus 7L 196 7L GHz 2L

GB 9527 ODU ALFOplus 7L 196 7L GHz 2H

GB 9528 ODU ALFOplus 7L 196 7L GHz 3L

GB 9529 ODU ALFOplus 7L 196 7L GHz 3H

Page 106: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 106/174

104ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

GB 9534 ODU ALFOplus 7M 154 7M GHz 1L

GB 9535 ODU ALFOplus 7M 154 7M GHz 1H

GB 9536 ODU ALFOplus 7M 154 7M GHz 2L

GB 9537 ODU ALFOplus 7M 154 7M GHz 2H

GB 9538 ODU ALFOplus 7M 154 7M GHz 3L

GB 9539 ODU ALFOplus 7M 154 7M GHz 3H

GB 9540 ODU ALFOplus 7M 154 7M GHz 4L

GB 9541 ODU ALFOplus 7M 154 7M GHz 4H

GB 9550 ODU ALFOplus 7M 168 7M GHz 1L

GB 9551 ODU ALFOplus 7M 168 7M GHz 1H

GB 9552 ODU ALFOplus 7M 168 7M GHz 2L

GB 9553 ODU ALFOplus 7M 168 7M GHz 2H

GB 9554 ODU ALFOplus 7M 168 7M GHz 3L

GB 9555 ODU ALFOplus 7M 168 7M GHz 3H

GB 9612 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 1L

GB 9613 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 1H

GB 9614 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 2L

GB 9615 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 2H

GB 9616 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 3L

GB 9617 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 3H

GB 9618 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 4L

GB 9619 ODU ALFOplus 13 266 13 GHz 4H

GB 9628 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 1L

GB 9629 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 1H

GB 9630 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 2L

GB 9631 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 2H

GB 9632 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 3L

GB 9633 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 3H

GB 9634 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 4L

GB 9635 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 4H

GB 9636 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 5L

GB 9637 ODU ALFOplus 15 315/322 15 GHz 5H

GB 9646 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 1L

GB 9647 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 1H

GB 9648 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 2L

GB 9649 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 2H

GB 9650 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 3L

GB 9651 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 3H

Page 107: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 107/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 105

GB 9652 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 4L

GB 9653 ODU ALFOplus 15 420 15 GHz 4H

GB 9662 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 1L

GB 9663 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 1H

GB 9664 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 2L

GB 9665 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 2H

GB 9666 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 3L

GB 9667 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 3H

GB 9668 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 4L

GB 9669 ODU ALFOplus 15 490 15 GHz 4H

GB 9690 ODU ALFOplus 15 728 15 GHz 1L

GB 9691 ODU ALFOplus 15 728 15 GHz 1H

GB 9700 ODU ALFOplus 18 1010 18 GHz 1L

GB 9701 ODU ALFOplus 18 1010 18 GHz 1H

GB 9702 ODU ALFOplus 18 1010 18 GHz 2L

GB 9703 ODU ALFOplus 18 1010 18 GHz 2H

GB 9704 ODU ALFOplus 18 1010 18 GHz 3L

GB 9705 ODU ALFOplus 18 1010 18 GHz 3H

GB 9708 ODU ALFOplus 17 144 17 GHz 1L

GB 9709 ODU ALFOplus 17 144 17 GHz 1H

GB 9716 ODU ALFOplus 18 1560 18 GHz 1L

GB 9717 ODU ALFOplus 18 1560 18 GHz 1H

GB 9718 ODU ALFOplus 23 1008 23 GHz 1L

GB 9719 ODU ALFOplus 23 1008 23 GHz 1H

GB 9720 ODU ALFOplus 23 1008 23 GHz 2L

GB 9721 ODU ALFOplus 23 1008 23 GHz 2H

GB 9726 ODU ALFOplus 23 1200/1232 23 GHz 1L

GB 9727 ODU ALFOplus 23 1200/1232 23 GHz 1H

GB 9728 ODU ALFOplus 23 1200/1232 23 GHz 2L

GB 9729 ODU ALFOplus 23 1200/1232 23 GHz 2H

GB 9730 ODU ALFOplus 23 1200/1232 23 GHz 3L

GB 9731 ODU ALFOplus 23 1200/1232 23 GHz 3H

GB 9736 ODU ALFOplus 25 1008 25 GHz 1L

GB 9737 ODU ALFOplus 25 1008 25 GHz 1H

GB 9738 ODU ALFOplus 25 1008 25 GHz 2L

GB 9739 ODU ALFOplus 25 1008 25 GHz 2H

GB 9782 ODU ALFOplus 38 1260 38 GHz 1L

GB 9783 ODU ALFOplus 38 1260 38 GHz 1H

Page 108: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 108/174

106ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

12.4 ODU INSTALLATION KIT

The ALFOplus system installation kit is concerning pole mounting of ODU according with the operating fre-

quency, dimensions and presence of the centring ring.

- V32308 for ODU with frequency from 15 to 38 GHz

The following installation kit is supplied with the equipment.

1+0 version

60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:

• centring ring and relevant screws

• pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

• 1+0 ODU support and relevant screws

• ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection.

Required tools for mounting (not supplied):

• N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench

• N.1 3 mm Allen wrench

• N.1 6 mm Allen wrench

• N.1 13 mm spanner

• N.2 17 mm spanner.

GB 9784 ODU ALFOplus 38 1260 38 GHz 2L

GB 9785 ODU ALFOplus 38 1260 38 GHz 2H

GB 9790 ODU ALFOplus 42 1500 42 GHz 1L

GB 9791 ODU ALFOplus 42 1500 42 GHz 1H

GB 9792 ODU ALFOplus 42 1500 42 GHz 2L

GB 9793 ODU ALFOplus 42 1500 42 GHz 2H

GB 9794 ODU ALFOplus 42 1500 42 GHz 3L

GB 9795 ODU ALFOplus 42 1500 42 GHz 3H

Page 109: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 109/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 107

37058

Section 8.ADDENDUM

13 INTRODUCTION

13.1 GENERALS

This document describes technical specifications (international standards, frequency range, bandwidth,

power, sensitivities, ....) for all available frequencies of ALFOPlus system.

Page 110: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 110/174

108ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

14 ALFOPLUS 11GHZ CHARACTERISTICS

14.1 FOREWORD

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

• EN 301 489-4 for EMC

• ITU-R F.387-10 and CEPT T/R 12-06 for RF channel arrangement

• EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio

• EN 300 132-2 characteristics of power supply

• EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: Class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:

class 2.3)

• EN 60950-22 for Safety

• IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces

14.2 GENERAL

The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.

14.2.1 Available frequencies

- Frequency band see Tab.17

Tab.17 - Frequency band

- Modulation scheme 4QAM/4QAMs/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/

128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM

- Capacity see Tab.18

- RF filter range Wide Filter Option see Tab.19 

- Transceiver tuning range see Tab.19

The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.20 and Tab.21.

Frequency range

(MHz)

Duplex spacing

(MHz)

Reference

recommendation

10715 - 11685 530 CEPT T/R 12-06

10715 - 11685 490CEPT T/R 12-06

ITU-R F.387-10

10695 - 11705 530 ITU-R F.387-10

Page 111: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 111/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 109

Tab.18 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment

Tab.19 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 11GHz

Modulation

Type

Channel bandwidth (MHz)

7 14 28 56

4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912

4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558

16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161

16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708

32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425

64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746

128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068

256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389

512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048

1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

FREQUENCY RANGE: 10.7 ÷ 11.7 MHz - GO-RETURN: 490 MHz

CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10 - f0=11200 MHz

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]RF Filter Tuning Range

[MHz]

1 10715 - 10895 11205 - 11385

1802 10875 - 11055 11365 - 11545

3 11035 - 11215 11525 - 11705

FREQUENCY RANGE: 10.7 ÷ 11.7 MHz - GO-RETURN: 530 MHz

CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F387-10 - f0=11200 MHz

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]RF Filter Tuning Range

[MHz]

1 10695 - 10875 11225 - 11405

1802 10855 - 11035 11385 - 11565

3 11015 - 11195 11545 - 11725

Page 112: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 112/174

110ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Tab.20 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 ÷ 11700 MHz - GO-RETURN: 490 MHz - 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning

Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 10718.5 10891.5 11208.5 11381.5

14 10722 10888 11212 11378

28 10729 10881 11219 11371

40 10735 10875 11225 11365

56 10743 10867 11233 11357

SUB BAND 2

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 10878.5 11051.5 11368.5 11541.5

14 10882 11048 11372 11538

28 10889 11041 11379 11531

40 10895 11035 11385 11525

56 10903 11027 11393 11517

SUB BAND 3

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 11038.5 11211.5 11528.5 11701.5

14 11042 11208 11532 11698

28 11049 11201 11539 11691

40 11055 11195 11545 11685

56 11063 11187 11553 11677

Page 113: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 113/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 111

Tab.21 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 530 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 ÷ 11700 MHz - GO-RETURN: 530 MHz - 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning

Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 10698.5 10871.5 11228.5 11401.5

14 10702 10868 11232 11398

28 10709 10861 11239 11391

40 10715 10855 11245 11385

56 10723 10847 11253 11377

SUB BAND 2

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 10858.5 11031.5 11388.5 11561.5

14 10862 11028 11392 11558

28 10869 11021 11399 11551

40 10875 11015 11405 11545

56 10883 11007 11413 11537

SUB BAND 3

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 11018.5 11191.5 11548.5 11721.5

14 11022 11188 11552 11718

28 11029 11181 11559 11711

40 11035 11175 11565 11705

56 11043 11167 11573 11697

Page 114: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 114/174

112ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

14.2.2 Transmitter characteristics

- Maximum transmit power see Tab.22

Tab.22 - Maximum transmit power

- Transmit power with ACM Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM

profiles transmit the same output power level,

that is equal to the Maximum transmit power

indicated in the table above for the highest

modulation level selected.

Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the

reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant

Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output

power indicated in the table above). Below thereference modulation the Mean Constant Mode is

followed.

- Tx bandwidth see Tab.41

- Frequency agility following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz

steps

- Built-in transmit power attenuation range 20 dB

- Attenuation Step 1 dB step

- RTPC attenuation range 20 dB

- Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation ±2 dB

- Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range 20 dB

- ATPC Attenuation Step 1 dB

- Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390

- RF frequency stability ±5 ppm

- ±10 ppm (including ageing)

- Muting attenuation 60 dB

MODULATIONNominal Output

Power [dBm]

Guaranteed Output

Power [dBm]

Nominal Power

Tolerance

4QAMs 27 25

±2 dB

4QAM 27 25

16QAMs 24 22

16QAM 24 22

32QAM 23 21

64QAM 23 21

128QAM 23 21

256QAM 23 21

512QAM 23 21

1024QAM 22 20

Page 115: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 115/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 113

14.2.3 Receiver characteristics

- Receiver bandwidth See Table 2

- Noise Figure 6.5 dB

- Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] see Tab.23

Tab.23 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]

- Signal to Noise Ratio [dB] see Tab.24

Tab.24 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH

[MHz]ENBW [MHz]

7 6.4

14 12.8

28 25.6

40 36.57

56 51.2

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM

7BER=10-6 7 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 9 11 15.5 17.5 20

14BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20

28

BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20

40BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20

56BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5

14BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

28BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

40BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

56BER=10

-620.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

Page 116: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 116/174

114ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities 2 [dBm] see Tab.25 

Tab.25

- Rx Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390

- AGC dynamic range from -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C° (PC reading)±2dB in the range -22dBm ÷ Thresholds @BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication over the

whole temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷ Thresholds @

BER=10-6

- ±4dB in the range -49dBm ÷ -22dBm

- Maximum input level for BER 10-6 -22 dBm

- Residual BER (RBER) 10-12

- Receiver Dynamic Range (3) [dB] see Tab.26

2 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2 dB lower

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM

7 BER=10-6

-93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0

BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0

14BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0

BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -80.0 -78.0

28BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5

BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5

40BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5

BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5

56

BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7BER=10-6 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

BER=10-10 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0

14BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

28

BER=10-6 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

BER=10-10 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5

40BER=10-6 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5

BER=10-10 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

56BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

3 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25dBm ÷ Threshold @ 10-6 +10dB)

Page 117: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 117/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 115

Tab.26 - Receiver Dynamic Range [dB]

14.2.4 Radio flange

- Radio WG flange type UBR 100

14.2.5 Power supply and consumption

- Operating voltage -36 ÷ -60 Vdc

- Power consumption see Tab.27

Tab.27 - Power consumption

14.2.6 Mechanical characteristics

- Physical size of system components see Tab.28

Tab.28 - Physical size of system components

- Weight of system components 4.3 kg

CHANNEL

BANDWIDTH

[MHz]

4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7 58.0 55.5 52.0 49.0 47.0 44.5 41.0 38.5 35.5 32.0

14 57.0 53.5 50.5 47.0 45.0 42.5 39.0 36.0 33.0 29.0

28 54.0 50.5 47.0 44.0 42.5 39.5 36.5 33.0 30.5 26.5

40 52.5 49.0 45.5 42.5 40.5 38.0 35.0 31.5 29.0 24.5

56 51.0 47.5 44.0 41.0 39.0 36.5 33.5 30.0 27.5 23.0

Typical PowerConsumption (W) Guaranteed PowerConsumption (W)

35   ≤ 37

Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm)

270.4 287.3 154.6

Page 118: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 118/174

116ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

14.2.7 Environmental conditions

- Operational temperature range -33° C ÷ +65° C

- Survival temperature range -40° C ÷ +70° C

- Operational humidity weather proof according to IP65 environmental

class

- Thermal resistance 5° C

- Solar heat gain   ≤ 150 km/h (in operation)

- Wind resistance   ≤ 200 km/h (survival)

Page 119: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 119/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 117

15 ALFOPLUS 13GHZ CHARACTERISTICS

15.1 FOREWORD

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

• EN 301 489-4 for EMC

• ITU-R F497 and CEPT Recommendation ERC/REC 12-02 for RF channel arrangement

• EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio

• EN 300 132-2 Characteristics of power supply

• EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:

class 2.3).

• EN 60950-22 for Safety

• IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces

15.2 GENERAL

The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.

15.2.1 Available frequencies

- Frequency band see Tab.29

Tab.29 - Frequency band

- Modulation scheme 4QAM/4QAMs/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/

128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM

- Capacity see Tab.30

- RF filter range Wide Filter Option (see Tab.31)

- Transceiver tuning range see Tab.31

The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.32.

Frequency Range

[GHz]

Duplex Spacing

[MHz]

Reference

Recommendation

12.75 ÷ 13.25 266 ITU-R F497 CEPT T/R 12-02

Page 120: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 120/174

118ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Tab.30 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment

Tab.31 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 13GHz

Modulation typeChannel bandwidth [MHz]

7 14 28 56

4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912

4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558

16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161

16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708

32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425

64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746

128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068

256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389

512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048

1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

FREQUENCY RANGE: 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz - GO-RETURN: 266 MHzITU-R F.497 - CEPT ERC/REC

12-02 E - f0=12996 MHz

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]RF Filter Tuning Range

[MHz]

1 12751 ÷ 12835 13017 ÷ 13101

842 12835 ÷ 12919 13101 ÷ 13185

3 12891 ÷ 12975 13157 ÷ 13241

4 12779 ÷ 12863 13045 ÷ 13129

Page 121: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 121/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 119

Tab.32 - 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz band - Go-Return 266 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz - GO-RETURN: 266 MHz -84 MHz RF Filter Tuning

Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel band-

width [MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 12754.5 12831.5 13020.5 13097.5

14 12758 12828 13024 13094

28 12765 12821 13031 13087

56 12779 12807 13045 13073

SUB BAND 2

Channel band-width [MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 12838.5 12915.5 13104.5 13181.5

14 12842 12912 13108 13178

28 12849 12905 13115 13171

56 12863 12891 13129 13157

SUB BAND 3

Channel band-

width [MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Highest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Lowest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Highest FrequencyCarrier [MHz]

7 12894.5 12971.5 13160.5 13237.5

14 12898 12968 13164 13234

28 12905 12961 13171 13227

56 12919 12947 13185 13213

SUB BAND 4

Channel band-

width [MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 12782.5 12866.5 13048.5 13132.5

14 12786 12870 13052 13136

28 12793 12877 13059 13143

56 12807 12891 13073 13157

Page 122: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 122/174

120ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

15.2.2 Transmitter characteristics

- Maximum transmit power see Tab.33

Tab.33 - Maximum transmit power

- Transmit power with ACM Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM

profiles transmit the same output power level,

that is equal to the Maximum transmit power

indicated in the table above for the highest

modulation level selected.

Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the

reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant

Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output

power indicated in the table above). Below thereference modulation the Mean Constant Mode is

followed.

- Tx bandwidth see Tab.31

- Frequency agility following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz

steps

- Built-in transmit power attenuation range 20 dB

- Attenuation Step 1 dB step

- RTPC attenuation range 20 dB

- Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation ±2 dB

- Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range 20 dB

- ATPC Attenuation Step 1 dB

- Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390

- RF frequency stability ±5 ppm

±10 ppm (including ageing)

MODULATIONNominal Output

Power [dBm]

Guaranteed Output

Power [dBm]Nominal Power Tolerance

4QAMs 27 25

±2 dB

4QAM 27 25

16QAMs 24 22

16QAM 24 22

32QAM 23 21

64QAM 23 21

128QAM 23 21

256QAM 23 21

512QAM 23 21

1024QAM 22 20

Page 123: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 123/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 121

15.2.3 Receiver characteristics

- Receiver bandwidth See Tab.31 

- Noise Figure 6.5 dB

- Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] see Tab.34

Tab.34 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth

- Signal to Noise Ratio [dB] see Tab.35

Tab.35 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] ENBW [MHz]

7 6.4

14 12.2

28 24.4

56 48.8

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM

7BER=10-6 7 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 9 11 15.5 17.5 20

14BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20

28BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20

56BER=10

-66.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5

14BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

28BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

56BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

Page 124: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 124/174

122ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities 4 [dBm] see Tab.36

Tab.36 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]

- Rx Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390

- AGC dynamic range from -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C° (PC reading)±2dB in the range -22dBm ÷ Thresholds @

 BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication over the

whole temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷ Thresholds @

BER=10-6

- ±4dB in the range -49dBm ÷ -22dBm

- Maximum input level for BER 10-6 -22 dBm

- Residual BER (RBER) 10-12

- Receiver Dynamic Range5  [dB] see Tab.37

4 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2 dB lower

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM

7BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0

BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0

14BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0

BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -80.0 -78.0

28BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5

BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5

56BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0

64QAM 128QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7BER=10-6 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

BER=10-10 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0

14BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

28BER=10-6 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

BER=10-10 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5

56BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

5 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25 dBm ÷ Threshold @10-6 + 10 dB)

Page 125: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 125/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 123

Tab.37 - Receiver Dynamic Range

15.2.4 Radio flange

- Radio WG flange type UBR 120

15.2.5 Power supply and consumption

- Operating voltage range -35 ÷ -60 Vdc

- Power consumption see Tab.38

Tab.38 - Power consumption

15.2.6 Mechanical characteristics

- Physical size of system components see Tab.39

Tab.39 - Physical size of system components

- Weight of system components 4.3 Kg

CHANNEL

BANDWIDTH

[MHz]

4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7 58.0 55.5 52.0 49.0 47.0 44.5 41.0 38.5 35.5 32.0

14 57.0 53.5 50.5 47.0 45.0 42.5 39.0 36.0 33.0 29.0

28 54.0 50.5 47.0 44.0 42.5 39.5 36.5 33.0 30.5 26.5

56 51.0 47.5 44.0 41.0 39.0 36.5 33.5 30.0 27.5 23.0

Typical Power

Consumption [W]

Guaranteed Power

Consumption [W]

37   ≤ 39

Width [mm] Height [mm] Depth [mm]

270.4 287.3 154.6

Page 126: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 126/174

124ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

15.2.7 Environmental conditions

- Operational temperature range -33°C ÷ +65°C

- Survival temperature range -40°C ÷ +70°C

- Operational humidity Weather proof according to IP65 environmental

class.

- Thermal Resistance Thermal resistance 0.5°C/W.

- Solar heat gain Not exceeding 5°C

- Wind resistance   ≤ 150 Km/h (in operation)

≤ 200 km/h (survival)

Page 127: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 127/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 125

16 ALFOPLUS 15GHZ CHARACTERISTICS

16.1 FOREWORD

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

• EN 301 489-4 for EMC

• ITU-R F.636 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 12-07 for RF channel arrangement

• EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio

• EN 300 132-2 characteristics of power supply

• EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: Class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:

class 2.3)

• EN 60950-22 for Safety

• IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces

16.2 GENERAL

The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.

16.2.1 Available frequencies

- Frequency band see Tab.40

Tab.40 - Frequency band

Frequency range

(MHz)

Duplex spacing

(MHz)

Reference

recommendation

14501 - 15348 420 ITU-R F.636

14403 - 15348 490 ITU-R F.636

14501 - 15348 728 CEPT T/R 12-07

14613 - 15251 322 N.A.

14620 - 15244 315 N.A:

Page 128: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 128/174

126ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

- Modulation scheme 4QAM/4QAMs/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/

128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM

- Capacity see Tab.40

- RF filter range Wide Filter Option see Tab.41

- Transceiver tuning range: see Tab.41Frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.42, Tab.43, Tab.44, Tab.45, Tab.46 and Tab.47.

Tab.41 - Net Radio throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment

Modulation

Type

Channel bandwidth (MHz)

7 14 28 56

4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912

4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558

16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161

16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708

32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425

64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746

128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068

256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389

512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048

1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

Page 129: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 129/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 127

Tab.42 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 15 GHz

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14501 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 420 MHzITU-R F636 - f0=11701MHz

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]RF Filter Tuning Range

[MHz]

1 14500 - 14620 14920 - 15040

1202 14612 - 14732 15032 - 15152

3 14724 - 14844 15144 - 15264

4 14808 - 14928 15228 - 15348

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14403 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 490 MHzITU-R F636 - f0=11701MHz

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]RF Filter Tuning Range

[MHz]

1 14402 - 14522 14892 - 15012

120

2 14514 - 14634 15004 - 15124

3 14626 - 14746 15116 - 15236

4 14738 - 14858 15228 - 15348

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14501 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 728 MHzCEPT T/R 12-07 -

f0=14924MHz

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]RF Filter Tuning Range

[MHz]

1 14500 - 14620 15228 - 15348 120

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14600 ÷ 15240 MHz - GO-RETURN: 322 MHz

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]RF Filter Tuning Range

[MHz]

1 14613 - 14705 14935 - 15027

92

2 14669 - 14761 14991 - 15083

3 14725 - 14817 15047 - 15139

4 14781 - 14873 15103 - 15195

5 14837 - 14929 15159 - 15251

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14600 ÷ 15240 MHz - GO-RETURN: 315 MHz

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]RF Filter Tuning Range

[MHz]

1 14620 - 14705 14935 - 15020

85

2 14676 - 14761 14991 - 15076

3 14732 - 14817 15047 - 15132

4 14788 - 14873 15103 - 15188

5 14844 - 14929 15159 - 15244

Page 130: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 130/174

128ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Tab.43 - 14501 - 14348 MHz band - Go-Return 420 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14501 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 420 MHz - 120 MHz RF Filter Tuning

Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14503.5 14616.5 14923.5 15036.5

14 14507 14613 14927 15033

28 14514 14606 14934 15026

56 14528 14592 14948 15012

SUB BAND 2

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14615.5 14728.5 15035.5 15148.5

14 14619 14725 15039 15145

28 14626 14718 15046 15138

56 14640 14704 15060 15124

SUB BAND 3

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Highest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Lowest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Highest FrequencyCarrier [MHz]

7 14727.5 14840.5 15147.5 15260.5

14 14731 14837 15151 15257

28 14738 14830 15158 15250

56 14752 14816 15172 15236

SUB BAND 4

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14811.5 14931.5 15231.5 15351.5

14 14815 14935 15235 15355

28 14822 14942 15242 15362

56 14836 14956 15256 15376

Page 131: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 131/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 129

Tab.44 - 1403 - 15348 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14403 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 490 MHz - 120 MHz RF Filter Tuning

Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14405.5 14518.5 14895.5 15008.5

14 14409 14515 14899 15005

28 14416 14508 14906 14998

56 14430 14494 14920 14984

SUB BAND 2

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14517.5 14630.5 15007.5 15120.5

14 14521 14627 15011 15117

28 14528 14620 15018 15110

56 14542 14606 15032 15096

SUB BAND 3

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Highest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Lowest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Highest FrequencyCarrier [MHz]

7 14629.5 14742.5 15119.5 15232.5

14 14633 14739 15123 15229

28 14640 14732 15130 15222

56 14654 14718 15144 15208

SUB BAND 4

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14741.5 14861.5 15231.5 15351.5

14 14745 14865 15235 15355

28 14752 14872 15242 15362

56 14766 14886 15256 15376

Page 132: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 132/174

130ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Tab.45 - 14501 - 15348 MHz band - Go-Return 728 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14501 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 728 MHz - 120 MHz RF Filter Tuning

Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14503.5 14616.5 15231.5 15344.5

14 14507 14613 15235 15341

28 14514 14606 15242 15334

56 14528 14592 15256 15320

Page 133: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 133/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 131

Tab.46 - 14600 - 15240 MHz band - Go-Return 322 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14600 ÷ 15240 MHz - GO-RETURN: 322 MHz - 92 MHz RF Filter Tuning

Range

SUB BAND 1

Channelbandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14616.5 14701.5 14938.5 15023.5

14 14620 14698 14942 15020

28 14627 14691 14949 15013

56 14641 14677 14963 14999

SUB BAND 2

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14672.5 14757.5 14994.5 15079.5

14 14676 14754 14998 15076

28 14683 14747 15005 15069

56 14697 14733 15019 15055

SUB BAND 3

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14728.5 14813.5 15050.5 15135.5

14 14732 14810 15054 15132

28 14739 14803 15061 15125

56 14753 14789 15075 15111

SUB BAND 4

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14784.5 14869.5 15106.5 15191.5

14 14788 14866 15110 15188

28 14795 14859 15117 15181

56 14809 14845 15131 15167

SUB BAND 5

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14840.5 14925.5 15162.5 15247.5

14 14844 14922 15166 15244

28 14851 14915 15173 15237

56 14865 14901 15187 15223

Page 134: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 134/174

132ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Tab.47 - 14600 - 15240 MHz band - Go-Return 315 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14600 ÷ 15240 MHz - GO-RETURN: 315 MHz - 85 MHz RF Filter Tuning

Range

SUB BAND 1

Channelbandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14623.5 14701.5 14938.5 15016.5

14 14627 14698 14942 15013

28 14634 14691 14949 15006

56 14648 14677 14963 14992

SUB BAND 2

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14679.5 14757.5 14994.5 15072.5

14 14683 14754 14998 15069

28 14690 14747 15005 15062

56 14704 14733 15019 15048

SUB BAND 3

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14735.5 14813.5 15050.5 15128.5

14 14739 14810 15054 15125

28 14746 14803 15061 15118

56 14760 14789 15075 15104

SUB BAND 4

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14791.5 14869.5 15106.5 15184.5

14 14795 14866 15110 15181

28 14802 14859 15117 15174

56 14816 14845 15131 15160

SUB BAND 5

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 14847.5 14925.5 15162.5 15240.5

14 14851 14922 15166 15237

28 14858 14915 15173 15230

56 14872 14901 15187 15216

Page 135: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 135/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 133

16.2.2 Transmitter characteristics

- Maximum transmit power see Tab.48

Tab.48 -Maximum transmit power

- Transmit power with ACM Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM

profiles transmit the same output power level,

that is equal to the Maximum transmit power

indicated in the table above for the highest

modulation level selected.

Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the

reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant

Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output

power indicated in the table above). Below the

reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode

is followed.- Tx bandwidth see Tab.41

- Frequency agility Following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz

steps

- Built-in transmit power attenuation range 20 dB

- Attenuation Step 1 dB step

- RTPC attenuation range 20 dB

- Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation ±2 dB

- Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range 20 dB

- ATPC Attenuation Step 1 dB

- Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390

- RF frequency stability ±5 ppm

±10 ppm (including ageing)

- Muting attenuation 60 db

MODULATIONNominal Output Power

[dBm]Guaranteed Output

Power [dBm]Nominal Power

Tolerance

4QAMs 27 25

±2 dB

4QAM 27 25

16QAMs 24 22

16QAM 24 22

32QAM 23 21

64QAM 23 21

128QAM 23 21

256QAM 23 21

512QAM 23 21

1024QAM 22 20

Page 136: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 136/174

134ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

16.2.3 Receiver characteristics

- Receiver bandwidth see Tab.41 

- Noise Figure 6.5 dB

- Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] see Tab.49

Tab.49 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]

- Signal to Noise Ratio (dB) see Tab.50

Tab.50 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm] 6 see Tab.51

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH

[MHz]ENBW [MHz]

7 6.4

14 12.2

28 24.4

56 48.8

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM

7BER=10-6 7 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 9 11 15.5 17.5 20

14BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20

28BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20

56BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5

14BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

28BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

56BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

6 Typical receiver sensitivities is 2dB lower

Page 137: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 137/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 135

Tab.51 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]

- Rx Spurious emissions According to ETSI EN 301 390

- AGC dynamic range From -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25° C (PC reading)±2dB in the range -22dBm÷Thresholds @

BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication over the whole

temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm÷Thresholds @

BER=10-6

±4dB in the range -49dBm ÷ -22dBm

- Maximum input level for BER 10-6 -22 dBm

- Residual BER (RBER) 10-12

- Receiver Dynamic Range (7) (dB) see Tab.52

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM

7BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0

BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0

14BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0

BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -80.0 -78.0

28BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5

BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5

56BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7BER=10-6 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

BER=10-10 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0

14BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

28BER=10-6 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

BER=10-10 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5

56BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

7 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25dBm ÷ threshold @10-6 +10dB)

Page 138: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 138/174

136ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Tab.52 - Receiver Dynamic Range

16.2.4 Radio flange

- Radio WG flange type CBR 140

16.2.5 Power supply and consumption

- Operating voltage range -35 ÷ -60 Vdc

- Power consumption see Tab.53

Tab.53 - Power consumption

16.2.6 Mechanical characteristics

- Physical size of system components see Tab.54

Tab.54 - Physical size of system components

- Weight of system components 4.3 kg

CHANNEL

BANDWIDTH

[MHz]

4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7 58.0 55.5 52.0 49.0 47.0 44.5 41.0 38.5 35.5 32.0

14 57.0 53.5 50.5 47.0 45.0 42.5 39.0 36.0 33.0 29.0

28 54.0 50.5 47.0 44.0 42.5 39.5 36.5 33.0 30.5 26.5

56 51.0 47.5 44.0 41.0 39.0 36.5 33.5 30.0 27.5 23.0

Typical Power

Consumption (W)

Guaranteed Power

Consumption (W)

37   ≤ 39

Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm)

270.4 287.3 154.6

Page 139: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 139/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 137

16.2.7 Environmental conditions

- Operational temperature range -33° C ÷ +65° C

- Survival temperature range -10° C ÷ +70° C

- Operational humidity Weather proof according to IP65 environmental

class

- Thermal resistance Thermal resistance 5° C

- Solar heat gain Not exceeding 5° C

- Wind resistance   ≤ 150 km/h (in operation)

≤ 200 km/h (survival)

Page 140: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 140/174

138ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

17 ALFOPLUS 18 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS

17.1 FOREWORD

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

• EN 301 489-4 for EMC

• ITU-R F.595 and CEPT Rec. T/R 12-03 for RF channel arrangement

• EN 302 217 for point to point fixed radio

• EN 300 132-2 characteristics of power supply

• EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: Class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:

class 2.3)

• EN 60950-22 for Safety

• IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces

17.2 GENERAL

The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.

17.2.1 Available frequencies

- Frequency band see Tab.55

Tab.55 - Frequency band

- Modulation scheme 4QAM/4QAMs/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/

128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM

- Capacity see Tab.56

- RF filter range Wide Filter Option (see Tab.57)

- Transceiver tuning range see Tab.57

The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.58 and Tab.59.

FREQUENCY RANGE

[MHz]

DUPLEX SPACING

[MHz]

REFERENCE

RECOMMENDATION

17700 ÷ 19700 1010 ITU-R F.595 - CEPT T/R 12-03

17700 ÷ 18140

19260 ÷ 197001560 ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7

Page 141: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 141/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 139

Tab.56 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipmen t

Tab.57 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 18GHz

MODULATION

TYPE

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]

7 14 28 56

4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912

4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558

16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161

16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708

32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425

64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746

128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068

256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389

512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048

1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 19700 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1010 MHz

ITU-R F.595 - CEPT REC T/R 12-03 - f0=18700 MHz

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]RF Filter Range

[MHz]

1 17699 ÷ 18058 18709 ÷ 19068 359

2 18016 ÷ 18375 19026 ÷ 19385 359

3 18332 ÷ 18691 19342 ÷ 19701 359

FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 ÷ 19700 MHz -

GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]RF Filter Range

[MHz]

1 17700 ÷ 18140 19260 ÷ 19700 440

Page 142: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 142/174

140ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Tab.58 - 17700 MHz ÷ 19700 MHz band - Go-return 1010 - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 19700 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1010 MHz - 359 MHz RF Filter Tuning

Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz] a

a. The actual channel bandwidth is compliant with a channel specing of 7, 13.75, 27.5 and 55 MHz re-

spectively

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 17702.5 18054.5 18712.5 19064.5

14 17706 18051 18716 19061

28 17712.75 18044.25 18722.75 19054.25

56 17726.5 18030.5 18736.5 19040.5

SUB BAND 2

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz] a.

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 18019.5 18371.5 19029.5 19381.5

14 18023 18368 19033 19378

28 18029.75 18361.25 19039.75 19371.25

56 18043.5 18347.5 19053.5 19357.5

SUB BAND 3

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz] a.

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Highest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Lowest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Highest FrequencyCarrier [MHz]

7 18335.5 18687.5 19345.5 19697.5

14 18339 18684 19349 19694

28 18345.75 18677.25 19355.75 19687.25

56 18359.5 18663.5 19369.5 19673.5

Page 143: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 143/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 141

Tab.59 - 17700 MHz ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz - 19700 MHz band go-return 1560

MHz - Frequency carrier limits

17.2.2 Transmitter characteristics

- Maximum transmit power see Tab.60

Tab.60 - Maximum transmit power

- Transmit power with ACM Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM

profiles transmit the same output power level,

that is equal to the Maximum transmit power

indicated in the table above for the highest

modulation level selected.

Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the

reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant

Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output

power indicated in the table above). Below the

reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode is

followed.

- Tx bandwidth see Tab.57

- Frequency agility following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz

steps

FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 ÷ 19700 MHz -GO-RETURN: 1560

MHz - 440 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz] a.

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 17703.5 18136.5 19263.5 19696.5

14 17707 18133 19267 19693

28 17713.75 18126.25 19273.75 19686.25

56 17727.5 18112.5 19287.5 19672.5

MODULATIONNominal Output Power

[dBm]

Guaranteed Output

Power [dBm]

Nominal Power

Tolerance

4QAMs 23 21

±2 dB

4QAM 23 21

16QAMs 21 19

16QAM 21 19

32QAM 19 17

64QAM 19 17

128QAM 19 17

256QAM 19 17

512QAM 19 17

1024QAM 18 16

Page 144: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 144/174

142ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

- Built-in transmit power attenuation range 20 dB

- Attenuation Step 1 dB step

- RTPC attenuation range 20 dB

- Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation ±2 dB

- Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range 20 dB

- ATPC Attenuation Step 1 dB

- Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390

- RF frequency stability ±5 ppm

±10 ppm (including ageing)

- Muting attenuation: 60 dB

17.2.3 Receiver characteristics

- Receiver bandwidth see Tab.57

- Noise Figure 7 dB

- Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] see Tab.61

Tab.61 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]

- Signal to Noise Ratio (dB) see Tab.62

Tab.62 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH

[MHz]ENBW [MHz]

7 6.4

14 12.2

28 24.4

56 48.8

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH

[MHz]4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM

7BER=10-6 7 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 9 11 15.5 17.5 20

14BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20

28BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20

56BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20

Page 145: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 145/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 143

- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities8 [dBm] see Tab.63

Tab.63 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]

- Rx Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390

- AGC dynamic range from -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C° (PC reading)±2dB in the range -22dBm ÷ Thresholds @

BER=10-6

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH

[MHz]64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5

14BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

28BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

56BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

8 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower.

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH

[MHz]4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM

7BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5

BER=10-10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5

14BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -81.5 -79.5

BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -79.5 -77.5

28BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0

BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0

56BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5

BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH

[MHz]128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM 64QAM

7BER=10-6 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

BER=10-10 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5

14BER=10-6 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

BER=10-10

-75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5

28BER=10-6 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

BER=10-10 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

56BER=10-6 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

BER=10-10 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

Page 146: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 146/174

144ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

- Accuracy of Rx level indication over the whole

temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷ Thresholds @

 BER=10-6

±4dB in the range -49dBm ÷ -22dBm

- Maximum input level for BER 10-6 -22 dBm

- Residual BER (RBER) 10-12

- Receiver Dynamic Range 9  (dB) see Tab.64

Tab.64 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB)

17.2.4 Radio flange

- Radio WG flange type UBR 220

17.2.5 Power supply and consumption

- Operating voltage range -35 ÷ -60 Vdc

- Power consumption see Tab.65

Tab.65 - Power consumption

17.2.6 Mechanical characteristics

- Physical size of system components see Tab.66

Tab.66 - Physical size of system components

- Weight of system components 4.3 kg

9 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25 dBm ÷ threshold @ 10-6 +10dB)

CHANNEL

BANDWIDTH

[MHz]

4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7 57.5 55.0 51.5 48.5 46.5 44.0 40.5 38.0 36.0 35.0

14 56.5 53.0 50.0 46.5 44.5 42.0 38.5 35.5 33.0 32.5

28 53.5 50.0 46.5 43.5 42.0 39.0 36.0 32.5 30.5 30.0

56 50.5 47.0 43.5 40.5 38.5 36.0 33.0 29.5 27.0 27.0

Typical Power

Consumption (W)

Guaranteed Power

Consumption (W)

33.5   ≤ 35

Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm)

270.4 287.3 154.6

Page 147: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 147/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 145

17.2.7 Environmental conditions

- Operational temperature range -33°C ÷ +65°C

- Survival temperature range -40°C ÷ +70°C

- Operational humidity weather proof according to IP65 environmental

class.

- Thermal Resistance thermal resistance 0.5°C/W

- Solar heat gain not exceeding 5°C

- Wind resistance   ≤ 150 Km/h (in operation)

≤ 200 km/h (survival)

Page 148: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 148/174

146ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

18 ALFOPLUS 23 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS

18.1 FOREWORD

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

• EN 301 489-4 for EMC

• ITU-R F.637-3 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 13-02 for RF channel arrangement

• EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio

• EN 300 132-2 Characteristics of power supply

• EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:

class 2.3).

• EN 60950-22 for Safety

• IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces

18.2 GENERAL

The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.

18.2.1 Available frequencies

- Frequency band see Tab.67

Tab.67 - Frequency band

- Modulation scheme: 4QAM/4QAMs/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/

128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM

- Capacity: see Tab.68

- RF filter range: Wide Filter Option see Tab.69

- Transceiver tuning range: See Tab.69

The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.70, Tab.71 and Tab.72.

FREQUENCY

RANGE [MHz]

DUPLEX SPACING

[MHz]

REFERENCE

RECOMMENDATION

22000 ÷ 23600 1008ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3

CEPT T/R 13-02

21200 ÷ 23600 1232 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1

21200 ÷ 23600 1200 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4

Page 149: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 149/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 147

Tab.68 - Net radio throughtput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment

Tab.69 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 23 GHz

MODULATION

TYPE

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]

7 14 28 56

4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912

4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558

16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161

16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708

32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425

64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746

128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068

256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389

512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048

1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

FREQUENCY RANGE: 22000 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1008 MHz

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 - f0=21196 MHz

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]RF Filter Tuning

Range [MHz]

1 22002.75 ÷ 22338.75 23010.75 ÷ 23346.75336

2 22254.75 ÷ 22590.75 23262.75 ÷ 23598.75

FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1232 MHzITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - f0=21196 MHz

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]RF Filter Tuning

Range [MHz]

1 21224 ÷ 21616 22456 ÷ 22848 392

2 21616 ÷ 22008 22848 ÷ 23240 392

3 22008 ÷ 22344 23240 ÷ 23576 336

FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1200 MHz

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4 - f0=21196 MHz

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]RF Filter Tuning

Range [MHz]

1 21213.5 ÷ 21605.5 22413.5 ÷ 22805.5 392

2 21605.5 ÷ 21997.5 22805.5 ÷ 23197.5 392

3 21997.5 ÷ 22389.5 23197.5 ÷ 23589.5 392

Page 150: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 150/174

148ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Tab.70 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - Go-return 1232 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 22000 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1008 MHz - 336 MHz RF Filter Tuning

Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 22006.25 22335.25 23014.25 23343.25

14 22009.75 22331.75 23017.75 23339.75

28 22016.75 22324.75 23024.75 23332.75

56 22030.75 22310.75 23038.75 23318.75

SUB BAND 2

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 22258.25 22587.25 23266.25 23595.25

14 22261.75 22583.75 23269.75 23591.75

28 22268.75 22576.75 23276.75 23584.75

56 22282.75 22562.75 23290.75 23570.75

Page 151: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 151/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 149

Tab.71 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - Go-return 1232 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1232 MHz - 392-336 MHz RF Filter

Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 21227.5 21612.5 22459.5 22844.5

14 21231 21609 22463 22841

28 21238 21602 22470 22834

56 21252 21588 22484 22820

SUB BAND 2

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 21619.5 22004.5 22851.5 23236.5

14 21623 22001 22855 23233

28 21630 21994 22862 23226

56 21644 21980 22876 23212

SUB BAND 3

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Highest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Lowest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Highest FrequencyCarrier [MHz]

7 22011.5 22340.5 23243.5 23572.5

14 22015 22337 23247 23569

28 22022 22330 23254 23562

56 22036 22316 23268 23548

Page 152: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 152/174

150ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Tab.72 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - Go-return 1200 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1200 MHz - 392 MHz RF Filter Tuning

Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 21217 21602 22417 22802

14 21220.5 21598.5 22420.5 22798.5

28 21227.5 21591.5 22427.5 22791.5

56 21241.5 21577.5 22441.5 22777.5

SUB BAND 2

Channel

bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Lowest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency

Carrier [MHz]

7 21609 21994 22809 23194

14 21612.5 21990.5 22812.5 23190.5

28 21619.5 21983.5 22819.5 23183.5

56 21633.5 21969.5 22833.5 23169.5

SUB BAND 3

Channel band-

width [MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Highest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Lowest FrequencyCarrier [MHz] Highest FrequencyCarrier [MHz]

7 22001 22386 23201 23586

14 22004.5 22382.5 23204.5 23582.5

28 22011.5 22375.5 23211.5 23575.5

56 22025.5 22361.5 23225.5 23561.5

Page 153: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 153/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 151

18.2.2 Transmitter characteristics

- Maximum transmit power see Tab.73

Tab.73 - Maximum transmit power

- Transmit power with ACM Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM

profiles transmit the same output power level,

that is equal to the Maximum transmit power

indicated in the table above for the highest

modulation level selected.

Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the

reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant

Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output

power indicated in the table above). Below thereference modulation the Mean Constant Mode is

followed.

- Tx bandwidth see Tab.69

- Frequency agility following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at

250 kHz steps

- Built-in transmit power attenuation range 20 dB

- Attenuation Step 1 dB step

- RTPC attenuation range 20 dB

- Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation ±2 dB

- Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range 20 dB

- ATPC Attenuation Step 1 dB

- Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390

- RF frequency stability ±5 ppm

±10 ppm (including ageing)

- Muting attenuation 60 db

MODULATIONNominal Output Power

[dBm]

Guaranteed Output

Power [dBm]

Nominal Power

Tolerance

4QAMs 23 21

±2 dB

4QAM 23 21

16QAMs 21 19

16QAM 21 19

32QAM 19 17

64QAM 19 17

128QAM 19 17

256QAM 19 17

512QAM 19 17

1024QAM 18 16

Page 154: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 154/174

152ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

18.2.3 Receiver characteristics

- Receiver bandwidth see Tab.69 

- Noise figure 7 dB

- Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] see Tab.74

Tab.74 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz]

- Signal to Noise Ratio (dB) see Tab.75

Tab.75 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities10 [dBm] see Tab.76

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH

[MHz]ENBW [MHz]

7 6.4

14 12.2

28 24.4

56 48.8

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM

7BER=10-6 7 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 9 11 15.5 17.5 20

14BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20

28BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20

56BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5

14BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

28BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

56BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

10 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower

Page 155: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 155/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 153

Tab.76 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]

- Rx Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390

- AGC dynamic range from -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C° (PC reading)±2dB in the range -22dBm ÷ Thresholds @

BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication over the

- whole temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷ Thresholds @

BER=10-6

- ±4dB in the range -49dBm ÷ -22dBm

- Maximum input level for BER 10-6 -22 dBm

- Residual BER (RBER) 10-12

- Receiver Dynamic Range 11 (dB) see Tab.77

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM

7BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5

BER=10-10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5

14BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -81.5 -79.5

BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -79.5 -77.5

28BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0

BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0

56BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5

BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7BER=10-6 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

BER=10-10 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5

14BER=10-6 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

BER=10-10 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5

28BER=10-6 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

BER=10-10 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

56BER=10-6 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

BER=10-10 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

11 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25 dBm ÷ threshold @ 10-6 +10dB)

Page 156: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 156/174

154ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Tab.77 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB)

18.2.4 Radio flange

- Radio WG flange type UBR220

18.2.5 Power supply and consumption

- Operating voltage range -35 ÷-60 Vdc

- Power Consumption see Tab.78

Tab.78 - Power Consumption

18.2.6 Mechanical characteristics

- Physical size of system components see Tab.79

Tab.79 - Physical size of system components

- Weight of system components 4.3 kg

CHANNEL

BANDWIDTH

[MHz]

4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7 57.5 55.0 51.5 48.5 46.5 44.0 40.5 38.0 36.0 35.0

14 56.5 53.0 50.0 46.5 44.5 42.0 38.5 35.5 33.0 32.5

28 53.5 50.0 46.5 43.5 42.0 39.0 36.0 32.5 30.5 30.0

56 50.5 47.0 43.5 40.5 38.5 36.0 33.0 29.5 27.0 27.0

Typical Power

Consumption (W)

Guaranteed Power

Consumption (W)

T.B.D.   ≤ T.B.D.

Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm)

270.4 287.3 154.6

Page 157: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 157/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 155

18.2.7 Environmental conditions

- Operational temperature range -33°C ÷ +65°C

- Survival temperature range -40°C ÷ +70°C

- Operational humidity weather proof according to IP65 environmental

class.

- Thermal Resistance thermal resistance 0.5°C/W.

- Solar heat gain not exceeding 5°C

- Wind resistance   ≤ 150 Km/h (in operation)

≤ 200 km/h (survival)

Page 158: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 158/174

156ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

19 ALFOPLUS 38 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS

19.1 FOREWORD

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

• EN 301 489-4 for EMC

• ITU-R F749-2 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 12-01 for RF channel arrangement

• EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio

• EN 300 132-2 Characteristics of power supply

• EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:

class 2.3).

• EN 60950-22 for Safety

• IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces

19.2 GENERAL

The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.

19.2.1 Available frequencies

- Frequency band see Tab.80

Tab.80 - Frequency band

- Modulation scheme 4QAM/4QAMs/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/

128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM

- Capacity see Tab.81

- RF filter range Wide Filter Option (see Tab.82)

- Transceiver tuning range see Tab.82

The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.83.

FREQUENCY RANGE

[MHz]

DUPLEX SPACING

[MHz]

REFERENCE

RECOMMENDATION

37000 ÷ 39500 1260 ITU-R F749-2 - CEPT T/R 12-01

Page 159: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 159/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 157

Tab.81 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment

Tab.82 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 38 GHz

Tab.83 - 37058 MHz ÷ 39438 MHz band - Go-Return 1260 MHz - frequency carrier limits

MODULATION TYPECHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]

7 14 28 56

4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912

4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558

16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161

16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708

32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425

64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746

128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068

256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389

512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048

1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

FREQUENCY RANGE: 37058 ÷ 39438 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1260 MHzITU-R

F.749-2 Annex 1 and CEPT REC T/R 12-01 Annex A - f0=38248 MHz

Sub BandLower Half Limits

[MHz]

Upper Half Limits

[MHz]

RF Filter Tuning

Range [MHz]

1 37058 ÷ 37618 38318 ÷ 38878560

2 37618 ÷ 38178 38878 ÷ 39438

FREQUENCY RANGE: 37058 ÷ 39438 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1260 MHz - 560 MHz RF Filter Tuning

Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel

bandwidth

(MHz)

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier (MHz)

Highest Frequency

Carrier (MHz)

Lowest Frequency

Carrier (MHz)

Highest Frequency

Carrier (MHz)

7 37061.5 37614.5 38321.5 38874.5

14 37065 37611 38325 38871

28 37072 37604 38332 38864

56 37086 37590 38346 38850

SUB BAND 2

Channel

bandwidth

(MHz)

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency

Carrier (MHz)

Highest Frequency

Carrier (MHz)

Lowest Frequency

Carrier (MHz)

Highest Frequency

Carrier (MHz)

7 37621.5 38174.5 38881.5 39434.5

14 37625 38171 38885 39431

28 37632 38164 38892 39424

56 37646 38150 38906 39410

Page 160: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 160/174

158ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

19.2.2 Transmitter characteristics

- Maximum transmit power see Tab.84

Tab.84 - Maximum transmit power

- Transmit power with ACM Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM

profiles transmit the same output power level,

that is equal to the Maximum transmit power

indicated in the table above for the highest

modulation level selected.

Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the

reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant

Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output

power indicated in the table above). Below thereference modulation the Mean Constant Mode

is followed.

- Tx bandwidth see Tab.81

- Frequency agility following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz

steps

- Built-in transmit power attenuation range 20 dB

- Attenuation Step 1 dB step

- RTPC attenuation range 20 dB

- Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation ±2 dB

- Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range 20 dB

- ATPC Attenuation Step 1 dB

- Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390

- RF frequency stability ±5 ppm

±10 ppm (including ageing)

- Muting attenuation 60 db

MODULATIONNominal Output

Power (dBm)

Guaranteed Output

Power (dBm)

Nominal Power

Tolerance

4QAMs 19 17

±2 dB

4QAM 19 17

16QAMs 17 15

16QAM 17 15

32QAM 15 13

64QAM 15 13

128QAM 15 13

256QAM 15 13

512QAM 15 13

1024QAM 14 12

Page 161: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 161/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 159

19.2.3 Receiver characteristics

- Receiver bandwidth see Tab.81 

- Noise Figure 9 dB

- Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (MHz) see Tab.85

Tab.85 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (MHz)

- Signal to Noise Ratio (dB) see Tab.86

Tab.86 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)

- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities12 (dBm) see Tab.87

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] ENBW (MHz)

7 6.4

14 12.2

28 24.4

56 48.8

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM

7BER=10-6 7 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 9 11 15.5 17.5 20

14BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20

28BER=10-6 6.5 9 13.5 16 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 18 20

56BER=10

-66.5 9 13.5 15.5 18

BER=10-10 8.5 11 15.5 17.5 20

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33.5

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35.5

14BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

28BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

56BER=10-6 20.5 23.5 26.5 30 33

BER=10-10 22.5 25.5 28.5 32 35

12 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower

Page 162: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 162/174

160ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Tab.87 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities (dBm)

- Rx Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390

- AGC dynamic range from -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C° (PC reading)±2dB in the range -22dBm ÷ Thresholds @

 BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication over the whole

temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷ Thresholds @

 BER=10-6

±4dB in the range -49dBm ÷ -22dBm

- Maximum input level for BER 10-6 -22 dBm

- Residual BER (RBER) 10-12

- Receiver Dynamic Range 13 (dB) see Tab.88

Tab.88 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB)

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM

7BER=10-6 -90.5 -88 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5

BER=10-10 -88.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5

14BER=10-6 -89.5 -86 -83 -79.5 -77.5

BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -77.5 -75.5

28BER=10-6 -86.5 -83 -79.5 -76.5 -75

BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -73.0

56BER=10-6 -83.5 -80 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5

BER=10-10 -81.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -69.5

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7BER=10-6 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5

BER=10-10 -75.0 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5

14BER=10-6 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5

BER=10-10 -73.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5 -59.5

28BER=10-6 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

BER=10-10 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -57.0

56BER=10-6 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

BER=10-10 -67.0 -64.0 -60.5 -58.0 -53.5

13 Range over which at least RBER performances are guaranteed (-25 dBm ÷ Threshold @ 10-6 +10dB)

CHANNEL

BANDWIDTH

[MHz]

4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7 55.5 53 49.5 46.5 44.5 42 38.5 36 33 29.5

14 54.5 51 48 44.5 42.5 40 36.5 33.5 30.5 26.5

28 51.5 48 44.5 41.5 40 37 34 30.5 28 24

56 48.5 45 41.5 38.5 36.5 34 31 27.5 25 20.5

Page 163: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 163/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002 161

19.2.4 Radio flange

- Radio WG flange type UBR 320

19.2.5 Power supply and consumption

- Operating voltage range -35 ÷ -60 Vdc

- Power consumption see Tab.89

Tab.89 - Power consumption

19.2.6 Mechanical characteristics

- Physical size of system components see Tab.90

Tab.90 - Physical size of system components

- Weight of system components 4.3 Kg

19.2.7 Environmental conditions

- Operational temperature range -33°C ÷ +65°C

- Survival temperature range -40°C ÷ +70°C

- Operational humidity weather proof according to IP65 environmental

class.

- Thermal Resistance thermal resistance 0.5°C/W

- Solar heat gain not exceeding 5°C

- Wind resistance   ≤ 150 Km/h (in operation)

≤ 200 km/h (survival)

Typical Power

Consumption [W]

Guaranteed Power

Consumption [W]

34   ≤ 36

Width [mm] Height [mm] Depth [mm]

270.4 287.3 154.6

Page 164: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 164/174

162ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Page 165: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 165/174

  ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002  163

Section 9.LISTS AND SERVICES

20 LIST OF FIGURES

Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication................................................ 10

Fig.2 - Elasticized band .................................................................................................. 10

Fig.3 - Coiled cord ......................................................................................................... 10

Fig.4 - Laser indication................................................................................................... 10

Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419 .................................................................... 11

Fig.6 - ALFOplus front/side view ...................................................................................... 26

Fig.7 - Reachable links in ALFOplus sub-network ............................................................... 27

Fig.8 - In-band management .......................................................................................... 28

Fig.9 - Drop node .......................................................................................................... 28

Fig.10 - LAO (Local Access Only) ..................................................................................... 28

Fig.11 - ALFOplus block diagram ..................................................................................... 31

Fig.12 - Synchronisation block diagram ............................................................................ 33

Fig.13 - ATPC diagram ................................................................................................... 35

Fig.14 - Available loops .................................................................................................. 35

Fig.15 - “0” red curve .................................................................................................... 47

Fig.16 - Header compression .......................................................................................... 50

Fig.17 - Line trunking .................................................................................................... 51

Fig.18 - Hierarchical structure of Maintenance Domains...................................................... 53

Fig.19 - ALFOplus GE ..................................................................................................... 55

Fig.20 - ALFOplus GO..................................................................................................... 56

Fig.21 - ODU ASN with standard coupling flange................................................................ 65

Fig.22 - 1+0 ODU installation.......................................................................................... 66

Fig.23 - Polarization disk ................................................................................................ 67

Fig.24 - 1+1 ODU installation.......................................................................................... 68

Page 166: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 166/174

164 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Fig.25 - 1+0 antenna flange ........................................................................................... 69

Fig.26 - 1+1 antenna flange ........................................................................................... 70

Fig.27 - F03594 cable .................................................................................................... 72

Fig.28 - F03608 cable .................................................................................................... 73

Fig.29 - ALFOplus connectors.......................................................................................... 74

Fig.30 - Local Area Connection ........................................................................................ 76

Fig.31 - IP address setting.............................................................................................. 77

Fig.32 - Frequency and power setting .............................................................................. 78

Fig.33 - Link general setting (Modulation&Capacity, Local Link ID)....................................... 79

Fig.34 - Main menu with Rx signal power level .................................................................. 81

Fig.35 - S/N measurement monitoring ............................................................................. 81

Fig.36 - Software download procedure ............................................................................. 82

Fig.37 - Vertical and horizontal adjustment ....................................................................... 84

Fig.38 - Antenna aiming block......................................................................................... 85

Fig.39 - Available loops .................................................................................................. 90

Fig.40 - Current alarm monitoring ................................................................................... 93

Fig.41 - Event log window .............................................................................................. 94

Fig.42 - Traffic management of "ALFOplus" unit................................................................. 96

Fig.43 - Transparent in-band management ....................................................................... 97

Fig.44 - VLAN based in-band management ....................................................................... 98

Fig.45 - VLAN based In-band drop node ........................................................................... 98

Fig.46 - Out-of-band management................................................................................... 99

Page 167: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 167/174

  ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002  165

Page 168: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 168/174

166 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Page 169: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 169/174

  ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002  167

21 LIST OF TABLES

Tab.1 - Artificial respiration .............................................................................................. 9

Tab.2 - Tx power............................................................................................................19

Tab.3 - Receiver thresholds (Interleaving enabled) .............................................................20

Tab.4 - Net Bit Rate........................................................................................................24

Tab.5 - Go-return frequency ............................................................................................25

Tab.6 - Tx power............................................................................................................37

Tab.7 - Receiver thresholds (Interleave enabled)................................................................38

Tab.8 - ALFOplus net bit rate ...........................................................................................42

Tab.9 - Ethernet service delay (latency), interleaving enabled ..............................................43

Tab.10 - Torques for tightening screws..............................................................................60

Tab.11 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency .................................................64

Tab.12 - Voltage measured in auxiliary port.......................................................................80

Tab.13 - ACM switching thresholds ...................................................................................83

Tab.14 - Alarms .............................................................................................................88

Tab.15 - Configurations...................................................................................................97

Tab.16 - RF band and RF filter band ...............................................................................102

Tab.17 - Frequency band...............................................................................................108

Tab.18 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment ..109

Tab.19 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 11GHz..................................................................109

Tab.20 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits .........110

Tab.21 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 530 MHz - Frequency carrier limits .........111

Tab.22 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................. 112

Tab.23 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz] ....................................................................113

Tab.24 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB] ................................................................................113

Tab.25 ........................................................................................................................114

Tab.26 - Receiver Dynamic Range [dB] ........................................................................... 115

Tab.27 - Power consumption..........................................................................................115

Tab.28 - Physical size of system components ................................................................... 115

Tab.29 - Frequency band...............................................................................................117

Tab.30 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment 118

Tab.31 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 13GHz.............................................................. 118

Tab.32 - 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz band - Go-Return 266 MHz - Frequency carrier limits................119

Tab.33 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................ 120

Tab.34 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth .............................................................................. 121

Tab.35 - Signal to Noise Ratio [dB] ................................................................................121

Tab.36 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm].............................................................. 122

Tab.37 - Receiver Dynamic Range ..................................................................................123

Page 170: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 170/174

168 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Tab.38 - Power consumption..........................................................................................123

Tab.39 - Physical size of system components ..................................................................123

Tab.40 - Frequency band...............................................................................................125

Tab.41 - Net Radio throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment ..126

Tab.42 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 15 GHz.............................................................127

Tab.43 - 14501 - 14348 MHz band - Go-Return 420 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ...............128

Tab.44 - 1403 - 15348 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits..................129

Tab.45 - 14501 - 15348 MHz band - Go-Return 728 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ...............130

Tab.46 - 14600 - 15240 MHz band - Go-Return 322 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ...............131

Tab.47 - 14600 - 15240 MHz band - Go-Return 315 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ...............132

Tab.48 -Maximum transmit power .................................................................................133

Tab.49 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz].....................................................................134

Tab.50 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)................................................................................. 134

Tab.51 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm].............................................................. 135

Tab.52 - Receiver Dynamic Range ..................................................................................136

Tab.53 - Power consumption..........................................................................................136

Tab.54 - Physical size of system components ................................................................... 136

Tab.55 - Frequency band...............................................................................................138

Tab.56 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .139

Tab.57 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 18GHz.............................................................. 139

Tab.58 - 17700 MHz ÷ 19700 MHz band - Go-return 1010 - Frequency carrier limits .............140

Tab.59 - 17700 MHz ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz - 19700 MHz band go-return 1560 MHz

- Frequency carrier limits ...............................................................................................141

Tab.60 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................. 141

Tab.61 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz].....................................................................142

Tab.62 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)................................................................................. 142

Tab.63 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm].............................................................. 143

Tab.64 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) ........................................................................... 144

Tab.65 - Power consumption..........................................................................................144

Tab.66 - Physical size of system components ..................................................................144

Tab.67 - Frequency band...............................................................................................146

Tab.68 - Net radio throughtput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment ..147

Tab.69 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 23 GHz.............................................................147

Tab.70 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - Go-return 1232 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ......148

Tab.71 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - Go-return 1232 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ......149

Tab.72 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - Go-return 1200 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ......150

Tab.73 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................. 151

Tab.74 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth [MHz].....................................................................152

Tab.75 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)................................................................................. 152

Tab.76 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm] .............................................................153

Tab.77 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) .......................................................................... 154

Tab.78 - Power Consumption ......................................................................................... 154

Tab.79 - Physical size of system components ..................................................................154

Page 171: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 171/174

  ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002  169

Tab.80 - Frequency band...............................................................................................156

Tab.81 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .157

Tab.82 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 38 GHz.............................................................157

Tab.83 - 37058 MHz ÷ 39438 MHz band - Go-Return 1260 MHz - frequency carrier limits ......157

Tab.84 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................. 158

Tab.85 - Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (MHz) ....................................................................159

Tab.86 - Signal to Noise Ratio (dB)................................................................................. 159

Tab.87 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities (dBm).............................................................. 160

Tab.88 - Receiver Dynamic Range (dB) ........................................................................... 160

Tab.89 - Power consumption..........................................................................................161

Tab.90 - Physical size of system components ................................................................... 161

Page 172: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 172/174

170 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002

Page 173: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 173/174

 ALFOplus - MN.00273.E - 002  171

22 ASSISTANCE SERVICE

For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the com-

pany manufacturing the product.

Page 174: ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

7/17/2019 ALFOplus User Manual - MN.00273.e ED2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/alfoplus-user-manual-mn00273e-ed2 174/174